Home

ISO: User's Manual TNC 407, TNC 415 B, TNC - i

1. 6 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Program Section Repeats Example for exercise Milling without radius compensation using program section repeats Sequence e Upward milling direction e Machine the area from X 0 to 50 mm program all X coordinates with the tool radius subtracted and from Y 0 to 100 mm G98 L1 e Machine the area from X 50 to X 100 mm program all X coordinates with the tool radius added and from Y 0 to 100 mm G98 L2 e After each upward pass the tool is moved by an increment of 2 5 mm in the Y axis at The illustration at right shows the block numbers containing the end points of the corresponding contour elements Part program 9685671 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 70 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 10 N40 T1 G17 S1750 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG N60 X 20 Y 1 MO3 N70 G98 L1 N80 G90 Z 51 N90 G01 X 1 F100 N100 X 11 646 Z 20 2 N110 G06 X 40 Z 0 N120 G01 X 41 N130 GOO Z 10 N140 X 20 G91 Y 2 5 N150 L1 40 N160 G90 Z 20 N170 X 120 Y 1 N180 G98 L2 N190 G90 Z 51 N200 G01 X499 F100 N210 X 88 354 7 20 2 N220 G06 X460 Z 0 N230 G01 X459 N240 GOO Z 10 N250 X 120 G91 Y 2 5 N260 L2 40 N270 G90 Z 100 M02 N99999 Ss671 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Start program Define blank form note new values Define tool
2. BREAK TOLERANCE RADIUS 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Pocket table for tool changer The TOOL P table for tool pocket is programmed EDIT TOOL TABLE in a program run operating mode POCKET LOCKED YES ENT NO NOENT FILE TOOL_P The soft key NEW POCKET TABLE or RESET eae POCKET TABLE is for erasing an existing pocket Se winnie table and writing a new one L 500000000 411011001 Like the tool table a pocket table can also be read in L 00000000 and read out directly through the data interface see 711010011 L 11011011 page 4 11 12 759 Y 5 370 105 000 U 45 001 230 987 T Rk M 5 9 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE RESET EDIT NEXT TOOL ll 1 POCKET TRBLE TRBLE TRBLE OFF ON LINE TRBLE Fig 4 6 Pocket table for the tool changer To select the pocket table Select tool table POCKET Select pocket table THBLE Set the EDIT soft key to ON To edit the pocket table Abbreviation Input Dialog P Pocket number of the tool T Tool number TOOL NUMBER F Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket FIXED POCKET YES ENT 7 NO NOENT L Locked pocket POCKET LOCKED YES ENT NO NOENT ST Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked SPECIAL TOOL PLC Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC PLC STA
3. Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired e Incremental jog positioning can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on this function e The machine tool builder determines whether the interpolation factor for each axis is set at the keyboard or with a step switch Positioning with manual data input MDI al Machine axis movement can also be programmed in the MDI file see page 5 45 Since the programmed movements are stored in memory you can recall them and run them afterward as often as desired 2 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 2 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M These are the soft keys in the MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL modes S TOUCH DATUM 30 RUT TOOL PROBE SET KA TABLE With these functions and with the override knobs on the TNC keyboard you can change and enter e spindle speed S OOOO e feed rate F only via override knob LILILILILI LI LI LI L e miscellaneous functions M LIC LILIDO LILDILI LI These functions are entered directly in a part program in the OUOU PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode S 50 X 150 L LJ LJ LJ gt G DOO T OUOU O L F Qs O L O L L Fig 2 4 Knobs for spindle speed and feed rate overrides To enter the spindle speed S u The machine tool builder determines which spindle speeds are allowed on your TNC
4. J OO X Fig 5 26 Full circle around J with a G02 Fig 5 27 Coordinates of an arc block TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates To program a circular arc with G02 around a circle center I J direction of rotation clockwise Circle in Cartesian coordinates clockwise Enter the first coordinate of the end point in incremental dimensions for example X 2 5 mm Enter the second coordinate of the end point in absolute dimensions for example Y 5 mm Conclude the block Further entries if necessary e Radius compensation e Feed rate e Miscellaneous function Resulting NC block G02 G91 X 5 G90 Y 5 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 ad Be 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Mill a full circle with one block Circle center Beginning and end of the arc Milling depth Tool radius Part program 20995201 G71 Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 1 Y 1 Z 20 Workpiece blank MIN point N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Workpiece blank MAX point N30 G99 T6 L 0 R 15 Define the tool N40 T6 G17 S1500 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool N60 X 50 Y 40 Pre position in the working plane N70 Z 5 MOS Move tool to working depth N80 14 50 J 50 Coordinates of the circle center N90 G01 G41 X450 Y 0 F100 Approach
5. Depart contour absolute cancel radius compensation N120 Z 100 M02 eses Retract in the infeed axis N99999 55361 G71 Part program for cutting a thread with more than 15 revolutions also see Chapter 6 N80 GO00 G40 G90 Z 12 75 M3 N90 G11 G41 R 32 H 180 F100 N100 G26 R 20 NTIC Ge EI serrin a E Identify beginning of program section repeat N120 G13 G91 H 360 Z 1 5 F200 e Enter thread pitch directly as an incremental Z dimension EAE N MEN EAT EEO A OEA E A AT Program the number of repeats thread revolutions N140 G27 R 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 35 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data The following miscellaneous functions enable you to change the TNC s standard contouring behavior in certain situations Smoothing corners Inserting rounding arcs at non tangential straight line transitions Machining small contour steps Machining open contours Programming machine referenced coordinates Smoothing corners M90 i Standard behavior without M90 The TNC stops the axes briefly at sharp transitions such as inside corners and contours without radius compensation Advantages e Reduced wear on the machine e High definition of corners outside Note In program blocks with radius compensation G41 G42 the TNC automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners Smoothing corners with M90 At corners the tool moves at constant speed
6. Do not program L 0 0 LABEL NUMBER ALREADY ASSIGNED A given label number can only be entered once in a program PROTECTED PGM Cancel edit protection if you wish to edit the program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 TNC Error Messages TNC error messages during test run and program run ANGLE REFERENCE MISSING e Complete your definition of the arc and its end points e f you enter polar coordinates define the polar coordinate angle correctly ARITHMETICAL ERROR You have calculated with non permissible values e Define values within the range limits e Choose probe positions for the 3D touch probe that are farther apart e All calculations must be mathematically possible AXIS DOUBLE PROGRAMMED Each axis can have only one value for position coordinates BLK FORM DEFINITION INCORRECT e Program the MIN and MAX points according to the instructions e Choose a ratio of sides that is less than 200 1 CHAMFER NOT PERMITTED A chamfer block must be located between two straight line blocks with identical radius compensation CIRCLE CENTER UNDEFINED e Define a circle center with I J JK IK e Define a pole with I J JK IK CIRCLE END POS INCORRECT e Enter complete information for connecting arc e Enter end points that lie on the circular path CYCL INCOMPLETE Define the cycles with all data in the proper sequence Do not call the coordinate transformation
7. Duration of feed rate F A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until the control encounters a block with a different feed rate If the new feed rate is GOO rapid traverse then after the next block with G01 the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing the feed rate F You can adjust the feed rate with the override knob on the TNC keyboard see page 2 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 23 4 Programming 4 5 Entering Tool Related Data Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rpm Input range 5 01099 999 rpm To change the spindle speed S in the part program Enter the spindle speed S for example 1000 rpm Resulting NC block T1 G17 S1000 To adjust the spindle speed S during program run On machines with stepless spindle drives the spindle speed S can be varied with the override knob 4 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and Program Stop Some M functions are not effective on certain machines The machine tool builder may also add some of his own M functions Refer to your machine manual for more information The M functions M for miscellaneous affect e Program run e Machine functions e Tool behavior The back cover foldout of this manual contains a list of M functions that are predetermined for the TNC The list indicates whethe
8. MP7290 1 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 0 01 mm 2 0 005 mm 3 0 001 mm 4 0 0005 mm 5 0 0001 mm 6 Display step for the Z axis MP7290 2 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 0 01 mm Z 0 005 mm 3 0 001 mm 4 0 0005 mm 5 0 0001 mm 6 11 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Display step for the IV axis MP7290 3 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 OOT mieu 0 005 mm 3 0 001 mm 4 0 0005 mm 5 0 0001 mm 6 Display step for the V axis MP7290 4 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 0 01 mm 2 0 005 mm 3 0 001 mm 4 0 0005 mm 5 0 0001 mm 6 Inhibit datum setting MP7295 Do not inhibit datum setting 40 Inhibit datum setting in the X axis 41 Inhibit datum setting in the Y axis 2 Inhibit datum setting in the Z axis 4 Inhibit datum setting in the IV axis 48 Inhibit datum setting in the V axis 76 Inhibit datum setting with the orange axis keys MP7296 Do not inhibit datum setting 0 Inhibit datum setting with the orange axis keys 1 Reset status display Q parameters and tool data MP7300 Reset them all when a program is selected 0 Reset them all when a program is selected and with MO2 M30 N99999 1 Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected 2 Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected and with M02 M30 N99999 3 Reset status display and Q parameters when a program is selected 4 Reset status display and
9. UPGMS G71 SIN HE qr Call subprogram at G98 L1 amp g N35 GOO G40 Z4100IW2 A innii cota genns Last block of main program with M2 No6 T SINE 1 Subprogram 1 e0 N39 207 with call of i subprogram 2 ex eoo ETE End of subprogram 1 WAS ES Le e Subprogram 2 ToN Er GST UE v ERE e E A End of subprogram 2 N9999 VoIP IMIS Ou T uesseuascnernedetretis i vanitas End of main program Program execution 1st step The main program UPGMS is executed up to block 17 2nd step Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39 3rd step Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called Ath step Subprogram 1 is called and executed from block 40 to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS 5th step Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 0 9 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Example for exercise Three groups of four holes see page 6 4 with three different tools Machining sequence Countersinking Drilling Tapping Machining data is entered in cycle G83 PECK at DRILLING see page 8 4 and cycle G84 TAPPING see page 8 6 The tool moves to the hole groups in a subprogram while the machin ing Is performed in a second subprogram Coordinates of the first hole i
10. e PILOT DRILLING G56 e ROUGH OUT G57 e CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 The SL cycles of group ll offer further contour oriented machining processes and are described later Each subprogram defines whether G41 or G42 radius compensation applies The sequence of points determines the direction of rotation in which the contour is machined The control infers from these data whether the specific subprogram describes a pocket or an Island e The control recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour e The control recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour e The machining of the SL contour is determined by MP 7420 e t is a good idea to run a graphic simulation before executing a program to see whether the contours were at correctly defined e The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is limited For example you can program 128 straight line blocks in one SL cycle e All coordinate transformations are allowed in programming the subcontours e Any words starting with F or M in the subprograms for the subcontours are ignored For easier familiarization the following examples begin with only the rough out cycle and then proceed progressively to the full range of functions provided by this group of cycles Programming parallel axes Machining operations can also be programmed in parallel axes as SL cycles In this case graphic simulation is not available The parallel axes must lie in the machining pl
11. 4 Rounding radius for tangential approach N160 D04 Q17 P01 Q7 P02 2 Feed rate at corners is half the feed rate for linear traverse Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 26 7 Programming with Q Parameters 9 Programming Examples N170 X Q1 Y Q2 MO3 Pre position in X Y pocket center spindle ON N180 Z 2 Pre position over workpiece N190 G01 Z Q5 FQ7 Move at feed rate Q7 100 to working depth Q5 15mm N200 G41 G91 X 013 G90 Y Q2 First contour point on the side N210 G26 RO16 Soft tangential approach with radius Q16 2 5 mm N220 G91 Y Q14 N230 G25 RO6 N240 X Q3 N250 G25 RO6 Mill sides of rectangular pocket incremental N270 G25 RO6 N280 X4 Q3 N290 G25 RO6 N300 Y Q14 N310 G27 RQ16 Soft tangential departure N320 GOO G40 G90 X O1 Y Q2 Depart contour absolute to pocket center cancel radius compensation N330 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 968771 G71 7 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 9 Programming Examples Bolt hole circles Bore pattern distributed over a full circle The entry values are listed in the program below in blocks N10 to N80 Movements in the plane are programmed with polar coordinates Bore pattern distributed over a circle sector The entry values are listed below in blocks N150 to N190 Q5 Q7 and O8 remain the same P
12. 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Radius compensation in circular paths You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block it must be activated beforehand in a line block Circles in the main planes When you program a circle the TNC assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is automatically defined when you set the spindle axis during a tool Spindle axis Main plane Circle center call T 7 XY G17 J UV XV UY Y ZX G18 K WU ZU WX WZ alg VW YW VZ Fig 5 22 Defining the spindle axis also defines the main plane and the circle center designation at You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main plane by using O parameters see Chapter 7 Circle center I J K For arcs programmed with G02 G03 G05 it is necessary to define the circle center This is done in the following ways e Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center e Using the circle center defined in an earlier block e Capturing the actual position If G29 is programmed the last programmed position is automatically used as the circle center or pole Fig 5 23 Circle center J Duration of circle center definition A circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is defined 5 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Entering I J K incrementally If you enter the circle center wit
13. 8 9 1 Fig 2 1 Interpolation factors for handwheel speed Ig 2 2 HR 330 electronic handwheel u The smallest programmable interpolation factor depends on the specific machine tool Your machine manual provides more detailed information on this subject Using the HR 330 electronic handwheel The HR 330 portable handwheel has an enabling switch that is located on the side opposite to the star grip and the EMERGENCY STOP switch You can only move the machine axes when the enabling switch is depressed qi e Aslong as the handwheel is attached to the machine tool the enabling switch is automatically depressed e Attach the electronic handwheel to a steel surface with the mounting magnets such that it cannot be operated unintentionally e Be sure not to press the axis direction keys unintentionally while the enabling switch is depressed when you remove the handwheel from its position TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 3 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning a machine axis moves by a preset distance each time you press the corresponding machine axis direction button Fig 2 3 Incremental jog positioning in the X axis ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL INTERPOLATION FACTOR Select incremental jog positioning with a key defined by your machine manufacturer here ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL JOG INCREMENT Enter the jog increment here 8 mm
14. Call tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the plane Start of program section 1 Program section for machining trom X 0 to 50 mm and Y 0 to 100 mm Call LABEL 1 repeat program section from block N70 to N150 forty times Retract in the infeed axis Pre position for program section 2 Start of program section 2 Program section for machining from X 50 to 100 mm and Y 0 to 100 mm Call LABEL 2 repeat program section from block N180 to N260 forty times Retract in the infeed axis 6 7 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 3 Program as Subprogram Operating sequence A program is executed up to the block in which another program is called block with 96 Then the other program is run from beginning to end The first program is then resumed beginning with the block behind the program call Operating limitations INSOSUS 9o A N99999 piis ME Programs called from an external data medium e g floppy disk must not contain any subpro grams or program section repeats No labels are needed to call main programs as Fig 6 3 Flow diagram of a program as subprogram subprograms jump B return jump The called program must not contain the miscel laneous functions M02 or M30 The called program must not contain a jump into the calling program Calling a program as a subprogram TL MEMMENNMMMMMMM Enter the name of the program that you wish to call from this
15. Oktober 1995 LIES NE NEM EM EM M M IND a ILI fe 9 A al de RS fal Wl E IR T IY sul 1 0 e A S D IF G H J IKI L wa Z X lc v B IN M HEIDENHAIN User s Manual ISO Programming TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Controls on the TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Controls on the visual display unit mA yay GRAPHICS Split screen layout I TEXT Toggle display between machining and programming modes SPLIT SCREEN Soft keys for selecting functions in screen E 5 Shift keys for the soft keys Vl Brightness contrast AA 9 Typewriter keyboard for entering letters and symbols JW E RMA arene GESTM 55 programming Machine operating modes MANUAL OPERATION EL HANDWHEEL POSITIONING WITH MDI PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK Dooce PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Programming modes PROGRAMMING AND EDITING TEST RUN gs Program and file management PGM MGT CL Select programs and files Delete programs and files not on TNC 426 Enter program call in a program External data transfer not on TNC 426 a MOD functions Pocket calculator TNC 426 only Moving the cursor and going directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Move the cursor highlight Go directly to blocks cycles and O parameter functions Override control knobs Feed rate Spindle speed 50 150 ANN F 96 0 Programming path mov
16. 226 Function not available on the TNC 426 M a M The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the TNC to the capabilities of the specific machine tool by setting machine parameters This means that not every machine tool will have all of the functions described in this manual Some of the TNC functions which are not available on every machine are e Probe functions for the 3D touch probe e Digitizing option conversational programming only e Measuring tools with the TT 120 touch probe conversational programming only e Rigid tapping e Re approaching a contour after an interruption Your machine manual provides more detailed information If you think a function may be unavailable because of a defect please contact the machine tool builder Many machine manufacturers and HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 This manual is intended both for the TNC beginner and the TNC expert The TNC beginner can use it as a step by step workbook The manual begins with an explanation of the basics of numerical control NC and provides a glimpse into their application in the TNC It then introduces the technique of conversational programming All of the examples can be practiced directly on the TNC Each function is explained thoroughly w
17. Contouring control for machines with up to five axes Features digital speed control and oriented spindle stop Logic unit keyboard color VDU with soft keys RS 232 C V 24 RS 422 V 11 Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with HEIDEN HAIN software TNC REMOTE Straight lines up to 5 axes TNC 407 3 axes Export versions TNC 415 F TNC 425 E and TNC 426 E 4 axes Circles up to 3 axes with tilted working plane Helices 3 axes Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions such as for 3D surfaces Collision prevention with the SL cycle for open contours G125 Geometry pre calculation for feed rate adaptation One part program can be edited while the TNC runs another program TNC 407 without graphics Interactive programming graphics Test run graphics Simultaneous program run graphics not with TNC 407 HEIDENHAIN conversational programming ISO programming Tool tables Datum tables Point tables Pallet files Text files System files TNC 426 170 MB hard disk for NC programs No limit on number of files TNC 425 TNC 415 B Battery buffered for up to 100 files Capacity 256K bytes TNC 407 Capacity 128K bytes Up to 254 tools in the program or in tables Functions for approaching and departing the contour Structuring long programs Additional feature on TNC 426 On screen pocket calculator 11 Tables Over
18. Coordinates of the circle centers x Q X Circle radii R 25mm Omm Omm 35 mm Y 5 65 mm Y 5 Setup clearance Milling depth mm Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min Finishing allowance Rough out angle Milling feed rate mm min TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Fig 9 17 Examples of overlapping contours Continued on next page 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Cycle in a part program 7098201 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 52500 NDO G37 POTT POZ 2 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 15 P03 8 P04 100 PO5 0 PO6 0 P07 500 N70 GOO G40 C90 Z 100 M06 N80 X 50 Y 50 MOS N90 Z 2 M99 N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98L1 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N180 G98 LO N99999 9658201 G71 Subprograms Overlapping pockets Pocket elements A and B overlap start of program Define workpiece blank In the CONTOUR GEOMETRY cycle state that the contour elements are described in subprograms 1 and 2 Cycle definition ROUGH OUT Retract in the infeed axis insert tool Pre position in X Y spindle ON Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call The control automatically calculates the points of intersection S and S they do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles N110 G98L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 N130 1435 J 50 G03 X410 Y 50 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N160
19. Example D15 PRINT 20 Transfers the corresponding error message see overview for D14 e D15 PRINT with Q parameter Example D15 PRINT O20 Transfers the value of the corresponding Q parameter You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerical values simultane ously Example D15 P01 1 P02 Q1 P03 2 P04 Q2 at The following notes apply to TNC 407 TNC 415 B and TNC 425 controls e f the part program is interrupted while D15 is active you must close the interface with the CLOSE RS 232 C soft key only available on TNC 407 TNC 415 B and TNC 425 e When D15 is used for transferring values to a PC the TNC generates the file FN15RUN A in the PC memory to store the transferred values only available on TNC 407 TNC 415 B and TNC 425 The following note applies to TNC 426 controls e he path for storing the texts and Q parameter values is entered in the menu option PRINT or PRINT TEST see Setting the Data Interface 7 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 6 Diverse Functions Formatted output of texts and Q parameter values El F PRINT a 425 uy The path for storing the texts and O parameter values is entered in the menu option PRINT or PRINT TEST see Setting the Data Interface page 10 5 The function D16 F PRINT transfers texts and Q parameter values in a selectable format through the data interface for example to a printer When you store the values in the
20. G75 G76 and CIRCULAR POCKET cycle G77 G78 Overlap factor MP7430 0 1 to 1 414 Permissible distance by which an end point can be off the path of a perfect circle MP7431 0 0001 to 0 016 mm Behavior of M functions MP7440 Program stop with MOG 0 No program stop with MOG 1 No cycle call with M89 0 Modal cycle call with M89 2 Program stop with M functions 40 No program stop with M functions 44 Kv factors cannot be switched through M105 and M106 0 Kv factors can be switched through M105 and M106 8 Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F function inactive 40 Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F function active 416 The Kv factors for position loop gain are set by the machine tool builder For more detailed information on this subject refer to your machine manual TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 13 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Machining and program run Corners whose angles are less than the entered value will be machined at a decelerated feed rate if radius compensation is RO or if the angle is at an inside corner This feature works both during operation with servo lag as well as with feed precontrol MP7460 0 0000 to 179 9999 Maximum contouring speed at a feed rate override setting of 10096 in the program run modes 307 y 7 OE ae 7 415 MP7470 0 to 99 999 mm min Datums from a datum table are referenc
21. MDI 5 45 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 1 Subprograms leeeseseeesseeeeseennn nenne nnn nnn nnn nsn anna rans usan nan 6 2 Operating SEQUENCE MER TI 6 2 Operating NIN ITA TIONS seers enn iA aaa sadayeatalroaaatentaasshetamaedtasedsdanasasiaas 6 2 Programming aM Call SUBPTOGTAITIS ceseesasipesapasnidwvans piriana aia a 6 3 6 2 Program Section Repeats cccssccsssecssseecseeeseeesneeeseesseeesaeeseass 6 5 Operating sequence sssssssssss III Ime nm nnnm n ne n ne n tan e nn e n enne enses 6 5 ENEE e M TU T ONT mH 6 5 Programming and executing a program section repeat sssssese 6 5 6 3 Program as Subprogram eeeeeseeeeeeeene ene nenne nnne nnn nnns 6 8 Operating SCQUCICE NENNEN T 6 8 Operating Imitations RENT 6 8 caling a programas A SUbDLIOG tI facie snchasasentncianhcns ssd ii A AEA EE E E A Ra 6 8 GINSENG aei E E EEE 6 9 Nesting dept aeui russimepper edt iea aaan ENEE eodd aA oe nd Nd uL E dU UR OR a n 6 9 Subprogram within a SUDDFOGI IM sscssxeosocsu ct ko ba tad dened XR ptn Pbi pR EDD Re ER ERI DU DEbU PRbGR Pai etnies 6 9 Repeating program section repeats sssssssssssse III Inner nnne 6 11 Repeating E1019 091915 82 arene CRUISE OO TQ UNSERE 6 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical
22. N135 GO4 F3 PROGRAM CALL G39 Application and activation Routines that are programmed by the user such as special drilling cycles curve milling or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles Input data Enter the file name of the program to be called The program is called with e G79 separate block or e M99 blockwise or e M89 modally Example Program call A callable program program 50 is to be called into a program via a cycle call Part program 339 POT 50 Program 50 is a cycle GOO G40 X420 Y 50 M99 Call program 50 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 53 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP G36 Application The control can address the machine tool spindle as a 6th axis and rotate it to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for e ool changing systems with a defined tool change position e Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of the HEIDENHAIN TS 511 3D touch probe system Activation The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 If M19 is executed without a cycle definition the machine tool spindle will be oriented to an angle which has been set in the machine parameters Fig 8 53 Oriented spindle stop al Apart from Cycle G36 oriented spindle stops can also be programmed in the machine parameters Prerequisite The machine must first be set up for th
23. NAO T1 G17 1500 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N70 G54 X 40 Y 60 Version 2 with datum shift N90 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N230 G98 LO N99999 9658401 G71 8 44 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Subprogram N110 G98 L1 N120 X 10 Y 10 MO3 N130 Z 2 N140 G01 Z 5 F200 N150 G41 X 0 Y 0 N160 Y 20 N170 X 25 N180 X 30 Y 15 N190 Y 0 N200 X 0 N210 G40 X 10 Y 10 N220 GOO Z 2 N230 G98 LO Depending on the transformations the subprogram is added to the program at the following positions NC blocks LBL 1 LBL 0 Datum shift block N110 block N230 Mirror image rotation scaling block N130 block N250 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables G53 Application Datum tables are applied for e frequently repeating machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece e frequent use of the same datum shift The datum points from datum tables are only effective with absolute coordinate values Within a program datum points can either be programmed directly in the cycle definition or called from a datum table Input Enter the number of the datum from the datum table or a Q parameter number If you enter a Q parameter number the TNC activates the datum number found in the Q parameter Cancellation e Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from a datum table e Execute the datum shift direc
24. Setting the BAUD RATE sssessese m m RI m n nmm nnnm nnn nnns 10 4 2 SIC MMTTE 10 5 10 5 Machine Specific User Parameters esee 10 6 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space 10 6 Overview of TUMCTIONS ssec renda tin rdaek daria baa ncc sor d dU Rc e t xd 10 7 10 7 Position Display Types eeseeereee rennen nnn 10 8 10 8 Unit of Measurement eeeseeeeeeeeneeee nennen nnn nnn nnn nn nnn 10 9 10 9 Programming Language for SMDI 10 9 10 10 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks conversational programming only 10 9 10 11 Axis Traverse Limits eeeeeeeeeee eee nennen nnn nnn 10 10 10 12 HELP IOS eoeiossskascevinmiune diti bveun cau Piacatiniessun dimi Es sialkwd Mae su sU Br iT RE RE 10 11 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters eeeeeeeereene menn nnns 11 2 Input possibilities for machine parameters sesssssssese e 11 2 Selecting general user parameters ssssssssssse e eene enne nennen 11 2 Extemaldata talis IBE ui euscpcusttatiertid rate Ep SE dvd tate a duae sida MER TRUE EE EE 11 3 9D touch prones antt CII ZINC sessuale rid hdd bata
25. comparisons You can use parametric programming for Conditional and unconditional jumps Measurements with the 3D touch probe during program run Output of values and messages Transferring values to and from memory The following mathematical functions are available Assign Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Angle measurement Trigonometry among others TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 osd 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure qi A convenient way to approach or depart the workpiece is on an arc which is tangential to the contour This is carried out with the approach departure function G26 see page 5 6 Starting point and end point Starting point From the starting point the tool moves to the first contour point The starting point is programmed without radius compensation The starting point must be e Approachable without collision e Near the first contour point e Located in relation to the workpiece such that no contour damage occurs when the contour is approached If the starting point is located within the shaded area of fig 5 4 the contour will be damaged when the first contour point is approached The optimum starting point S is located in the extension of the tool path for machining the first contour Fig 5 3 Starting point G of machining First contour point Machining begins at the first contour point The tool moves to this point with radius comp
26. conclude the block with END 3 ER G function for input of the MAX point Entry as absolute value or as incremental value Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and conclude the block with END TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 21 4 4 4 4 22 Programming Program Creation The following blocks then appear on the TNC screen as program text NEW G71 Block 1 Program begin name dimensional unit N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 40 Block 2 Tool axis MIN point coordinates N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Block 3 MAX point coordinates N99999 NEW G71 Block 4 Program end name dimensional unit The dimensional unit used in the program appears behind the program name G71 millimeters TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 5 Entering Tool Related Data Besides the tool data and compensation you must also enter the following information e Feedrate F e Spindle speed S e Miscellaneous functions M Fig 4 14 Feed rate F and spindle speed S of the tool Feed rate F The feed rate is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center moves Input range F 0 to 300 000 mm min 1181 ipm The maximum feed rate is set individually for each axis by means of machine parameters Input IF p a BOL Enter the feed rate for example F 100 mm min Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Is programmed directly with GOO
27. e FE 401 with program no 230 626 03 or higher FE1 HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit with program number below 230 626 02 FE2 PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNC EXE FEZ HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit ME T no longer produced Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as printers tape punchers PCs without TNC EXE EXT1 EXT2 PC with HEIDENHAIN software TNC REMOTE for remote operation LSV2 uit e The HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit ME mode of operation can only be used in the TNC mode of operation PROGRAMMING AND EDITING not on TNC 426 The following note applies to the TNC 426 e The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the operating modes FE2 and EXT Setting the BAUD RATE On the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 controls the baud rate data transfer speed can be selected from 110 to 38 400 baud The baud rate of the ME 101 is 2400 baud On the TNC 426 the baud rate data transfer speed can be selected from 110 to 115 200 baud 10 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 4 Setting the External Data Interfaces ASSIGN This function sets the destination for the transferred data Applications e Transferring values with O parameter function D15 e Transferring values with Q parameter function D16 only with TNC 426 e Path on the TNC s hard disk in which the digitized data are stored only with TNC 426 The TNC m
28. enter a program call with 96 see page 6 8 after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example If 10 equals 10 go to label 1 D09 P01 10 P02 10 POS 1 Select the jump function to display the following options Overview Soft key D9 IF EQUAL JUMP ES Example D09 P01 Q1 P02 03 P035 IF X EQ V If the two values or parameters are equal GOTO jump to the given label D10 IF NOT EQUAL JUMP TE Example D10 PO1 10 PO2 Q5 P03 10 IF M NE v If the two values or parameters are not equal GOTO jump to the given label D11 IF GREATER THAN JUMP m Example D11 P01 Q1 PO2 10 P03 5 IF 4 GT V If the first value or parameter is greater than the GOTO second value or parameter jump to the given label D12 IF LESS THAN JUMP UT Example D12 P01 05 PO2 0 PO3 1 IF X4 LT V If the first value or parameter is less than the GOTO second value or parameter jump to the given label TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 11 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 4 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters Jump example You want to jump to program 100 H as soon as Q5 becomes negative DOO Q5 P01 10 Assign a value such as 10 to parameter Q5 D02 O5 P01 05 P02 12 Reduce the value of Q5 D12 P01 Q5 P02 0 P035 If 05 lt 0 jump to label 5 G98Lb5 100 H 7 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Progr
29. following functions are available Function Soft key Select a file type SELECT ai of Ea Uh gr tm Copy a file and convert Rae 2 Copy a directory COPY DIR C3 Uy Erase a file or directory DELETE eS Rename a file RENAME Tag files TAG Read the tree structure of an external device SHOL and show it on the TNC screen TREE Display the last ten files that were selected LAST FILES Protect a file PROTECT B ep Cancel file protection UNPROTECT Convert FK program FK H alg eh TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1235 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 Selecting file types SELECT TYPE SHOL ALL SHOL Call the file manager List the file types SHOL SHOLIJ SHOLI SHOLI SHOL Show all files or To copy individual files show only one type for example HEIDENHAIN conversational programs file type H You must be in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file you wish to copy Move the highlight to the desired file Press the COPY soft key Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline Press the ENT key or the EXECUTE soft key to copy the file into the active directory The original file is retained Close the file manager with END e f you are copying tables you can overwrite individual lines or columns in the target table with t
30. no direction of rotation given 5 30 16 Circular interpolation polar tangential contour transition 5 32 Cycles 04 Dwell time e 8 53 28 Mirror image 8 48 36 Oriented spindle stop 8 54 37 Definition of the contour geometry 8 18 39 Program call cycle call with G79 e 8 53 53 Datum shift in datum table 8 45 54 Datum shift in program 9 43 56 Pilot drilling in connection with G37 SLI 8 27 57 Rough out in connection with G37 SLI 8 19 58 Contour milling clockwise in connection with G37 SLI 8 28 59 Contour milling counterclockwise in connection with G37 SLI 8 28 72 Scaling factor 8 51 73 Rotation of the coordinate system 8 50 74 Slot milling 9 11 75 Rectangular pocket milling clockwise 8 13 76 Rectangular pocket milling counterclockwise 8 13 Z7 Circular pocket milling clockwise 8 15 78 Circular pocket milling counterclockwise 8 15 80 Working plane 8 55 83 Pecking 9 4 84 Tapping with floating tap holder 8 6 85 Rigid tapping 8 8 86 Thread cutting 8 9 120 Contour data 8 32 121 Pilot drilling in connection with G37 SLII 8 33 122 Rough out in connection with G37 SLII 8 34 123 Floor finishing in connection with G37 SLII 9 34 124 Side finishing in connection with G37 SLII 8 35 125 Contour train in connection with G37 SLII 8 37 127 Cylinder surface in connection with G37 SLII 9 39 79 Cycle call e 9 3 Select working plane 17 Working plane XY tool axis Z 5 16 18 Working plane ZX tool axis Y 5 16 19 Working plane YZ tool axis X
31. 1 eeeeeeeeeseee eene nennen nnn nnns 7 25 Rectangular pocket with island corner rounding and tangential approach 7 25 ale eae Ke O RNC RETE EMT 7 27 US FR 7 29 Hemisphere machined with end Mill eese 7 31 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 1 General Overview of Cycles cessere nere 8 2 Programming EET 1o ERR om E 8 2 Dimensions Tm the TOO GIS ss udo etim essendi tute eruit aie Bue vals e E E aa a Aaaa E a iA EA a 8 3 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles eror eco oe oua sias Del bata x aes sau SUE uera dE Sb E 8 4 FR HS c 8 4 TAPPING with tloatibig tap holder G84 eisernen du bbb bb er iiaa 8 6 RIGID TAPPING C M TTE 8 8 TEIBEAD CUTTING 1080 sirinin asiani ienaa iuge ttd nantes R tg FUR oU uunc diu atit ia 8 9 SLOT GH en oanetetog 9 11 oM AIWEUENITIENICEL CUNTUR 8 13 CIRCULAR POCKET MIELUN G77 G7 uscite te edic auti icons i tonc ccu e Baeza 8 15 8 3 SL Cycles Group T uio peninsula ux o Dax va autca mentee eee 8 17 CONTOUR GEOMETRY G37 sireeni anea EEan ibis vau bad dus xx ad cnr pad unu rata cata a 8 18 x8 CU OMe Clays Em 8 19 Overlapping CONTOUTS wiadcucadivnntdcamedestewosdacnttnnmdcaumianvinades EENAA EEE NE ENE 8 21 aiEOIMIPI INE CECINIT 8 27 CONTOUR WING T5 DO sosaasnsiiionxdedidbtaiidtdd aiamaa aaia ia aiaa 8 28 8 4 SL Cycles Group ll a snannnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
32. 27 3rd step 100 27 73 e Distributive law alb c 2 ab ac Programming example Calculate an angle with arc tangent as opposite side O12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Select the formula entering function Shift the soft key row to the right Select arc tangent Shift the soft key row back to the left Open parentheses Enter parameter number Q13 Close parentheses conclude formula entry Resulting NC block Q25 ATAN Q12 Q13 7 22 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run The 3D touch probe can measure positions on the workpiece while the program is being run Applications e Measuring differences in the height of cast surfaces e olerance checking during machining To program the use of a touch probe press the TOUCH PROBE key You pre position the probe to automatically probe the desired position The coordinate measured for the probe point is stored under a Q parameter The TNC interrupts the probing process if the stylus is not deflected within a certain distance selectable via MP6130 Upon contact the position coordinates of the probe are stored in the parameters Q115 to Q119 The stylus length and radius are not included in these values Fig 7 4 Dimensions to be measured uit e Pre position the probe manually to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approach
33. 407 8 3 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles PECKING G83 Process e The tool drills from the starting point to the first pecking depth at the programmed feed rate e When it reaches the first pecking depth the tool retracts In rapid traverse to the starting position and advances again to the first pecking depth minus the advanced stop distance t see calcula tions e he tool advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate e Drilling and retracting are performed alternately until the programmed total hole depth is reached e After the dwell time at the hole bottom the tool Is retracted to the starting position in rapid traverse for chip breaking Fig 8 1 PECKING cycle Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface e TOTAL HOLE DEPTH B Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH Infeed per cut If the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH equals the PECKING DEPTH the tool will drill to the programmed total hole depth in one operation The PECKING DEPTH does not have to be a multiple of the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH If the PECKING DEPTH is programmed greater than the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH the tool only advances to the specified TOTAL HOLE DEPTH e DWELL TIME in seconds Amount of time the tool remains at the total ho
34. 5 16 20 Tool axis IV 5 16 24 Chamfer with length R 5 13 25 Corner rounding with R 5 26 26 Tangential contour approach with R 5 6 27 Tangential contour departure with R 5 6 29 Transfer the last nominal position value as pole 5 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11431 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 Address Letters ISO Group G Function Non modal See function Page Define blank form 30 Blank form definition for graphics MIN point 4 21 3l Blank form definition for graphics MAX point 4 21 38 Stop program run 3 5 Tool path compensation 40 No tool radius compensation 4 18 41 Tool radius compensation left of the contour RL 4 18 42 Tool radius compensation right of the contour RR 4 18 43 Paraxial compensation lengthening R 4 18 44 Paraxial compensation shortening R 4 18 94 Next tool number with central tool file e 4 15 55 Programmable probing function 7 23 Unit of measurement 70 Inches at start of program 4 21 71 Millimeters at start of program 4 21 Dimensioning 90 Absolute dimensions 1 15 91 Incremental dimensions 1 15 98 Set label number 6 2 99 Tool definition in program e 4 7 11 32 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 Address Letters ISO Address Function letter Beginning of program or program call with G39 Rotary motion about the X axis Rotary motion about the Y axis Rotary motion about the Z axis Parameter definition program parameter Q OEM
35. 5 Coordinate Transformations MIRROR IMAGE G28 Application This cycle allows you to machine the mirror image of a contour in the machining plane Activation The mirror image cycle becomes active immediate ly upon being defined The mirrored axis is shown in the additional status display e f one axis is mirrored the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in fixed cycles e f two axes are mirrored the machining direction remains the same The result depends on the location of the datum Fig 8 50 Mirroring a contour e f the datum is located on the contour to be mirrored the part simply flips over e f the datum is located outside the contour to be mirrored the part also jumps to another location Input data Enter the axes that you wish to mirror The tool axis cannot be mirrored Cancellation This cycle is cancelled by entering G28 without an axis Fig 8 51 Repeated mirroring machining direction Fig 8 52 Datum located outside the contour to be mirrored 8 48 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Example Mirror image A program section subprogram 1 is to be exe cuted once as originally programmed at position X 0 Y 0 CD and then mirrored once in X 3 at position X 70 Y 60 MIRROR IMAGE cycle in a part program 5844 G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 1
36. 6 Introduction File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Programs texts and tables are written as files and stored in the TNC Files in the TNC File identification Programs e in HEIDENHAIN plain language dialog PROG15 e in ISO format Tables for File name File type e ools e Pallets e Datums e Points digitizing range for measuring touch probe To open a new file you must enter a file name consisting of from one to 16 characters letters and numbers depending on MP7222 The file types are listed in the table at right Texts as e ASCII files Fig 1 39 TNC file types File directory Task Mode of Call file directory The TNC can store up to 100 files at one time operation MID You can call up a directory of these programs by Create new files pressing the PGM NAME key To delete one or more programs press the CL PGM key Panties The file directory contains the following information Erase files File dede Test files File type File size in bytes 2characters File status Execute files Further information is shown at the top of the screen Fig 1 40 Filemanagement functions e Selected file storage TNC memory External storage over RS 232 interface External storage over RS 422 DATUM TABLE EDITING FILE NAME MeF F e Interface mode e g FE1 EXT1 for external BYTE STATUS storage e File type e g H if only HEIDENHAIN dialog programs are shown 1 88
37. A tool change position must be located next to or above the workpiece where no collisions are possible With the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 see page 5 39 you can enter machine referenced rather than workpiece referenced coordinates for the tool change position If TO is programmed before the first tool call the TNC moves the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that is independent of the tool length If a positive length compensation was in effect before TO the clearance to the workpiece will be reduced Automatic tool change IM 101 LT This function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on M101 Standard behavior without M101 When the tool reaches the maximum tool life TIME1 the TNC flags this information in the TNC memory The machine tool builder determines how the individual machine tool will respond to this condition refer to the machine manual Automatic tool change with M101 The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME1 or TIME2 expires during program run However the tool is not changed immediate ly after expiration of the tool life but depending on the workload of the processor a few NC blocks later Duration of effect M101 is reset with M102 Standard NC blocks with radius compensation G40 G41 G42 The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the original tool If the radii are not eq
38. B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons 5 Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on this function The axis moves as long as the corresponding axis direction button Is held down You can move more than one axis at once In this way For continuous movement MANUAL OPERATION Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the e g e D machine START button The axis continues to move after you release the keys together To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move more than one axis at once in this way 2 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Traversing with an electronic handwheel ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL INTERPOLATION FACTOR Enter the interpolation factor see table Select the axis that you wish to move For portable handwheels make the selection at the handwheel for integral handwheels at the TNC keyboard Now move the selected axis with the electronic handwheel If you are using the portable handwheel first press the enabling switch on side of handwheel Interpolation factor Traverse in mm per revolution 20 000 10 000 5 000 2 500 1 250 0 625 0 312 0 156 0 078 0 099 0 019 1 2 9 4 9 6
39. Danish 8 Finnish 9 Dutch 70 Protect OEM cycles in the TNC program memory MP7240 Protect programs 0 Do not protect programs 1 Configure tool tables MP7260 Inactive 0 Number of tools per tool table 7 to 254 Configure pocket tables MP7261 Inactive 0 Number of pockets per pocket table 1 to 254 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Configure tool table column number of the data in the tool table for Do not show data in the table enter 0 MP7266 0 MP7266 1 MP7266 2 MP7266 3 MP7266 4 MP7266 5 MP7266 6 MP7266 7 MP7266 8 MP7266 9 MP7266 10 MP7266 11 MP7266 12 MP7266 13 MP7266 14 MP7266 15 MP7266 16 MP7266 17 MP7266 18 MP7266 19 MP7266 20 MP7266 21 Tool name NAME 0 to 24 Tool length L 0 to 24 Tool radius R 0 to 24 Tool radius R2 0 to 24 Oversize length DL 0 to 24 Oversize radius DR 0 to 24 Oversize radius2 DR2 0 to 24 Tool locked TL 0 to 24 Replacement tool RT 0 to 24 Maximum tool life TIME1 0 to 24 Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME2 0 to 24 Current tool age CUR TIME 0 to 24 Tool comment DOC 0 to 24 Number of cutting edges CUT 0 to 24 Length tolerance for tool wear LTOL 0 to 24 Radius tolerance for tool wear RTOL 0 to 24 Cutting direction DIRECT 0 to 24 PLC status PLC 0 to 24 Tool offset in addition t
40. G71 start of program Define workpiece blank Define tools Cycle definition Contour Geometry Cycle definition Contour Data Call subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Pilot Drilling Cycle call Pilot Drilling Call subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Rough Out Cycle call Rough Out Call subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Floor Finishing Cycle call Floor Finishing Cycle definition Side Finishing Cycle call Side Finishing Subprogram for tool change Contour subprogram Rectangular Pocket Contour subprogram Circular Island TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group II CONTOUR TRAIN G125 Sequence This cycle facilitates the machining of open contours the starting point of the contour is not the same as its end point G125 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over machining an open contour using positioning blocks e he control monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface blemishes It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of the contour before execution e f the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked e The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling e he tool can be traversed back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining e Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough Fig 8 4
41. G96 Le N230 G01 G42 X 90 Y 50 N240 1465 J 50 G03 X490 Y 50 N250 G98 LO N99999 S822 G71 Fig 8 24 Overlapping islands area of inclusion at The subprograms and supplements are entered in the main program on page 8 24 8 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Area of exclusion Surface A is to be left unmachined without the portion overlapped by B e A must be an island and B a pocket e B must start within A N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 G98 L2 G01 G42 X410 Y 50 I1 35 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 G98 LO G98 L3 G01 G41 X 40 Y 50 I1 65 J 50 G03 X 40 Y 50 G98 LO N99999 59221 G71 Area of intersection Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to remain unmachined e Aand B must be islands e A must start within B N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 G98 L2 G01 G42 X 60 Y 50 I1 35 J 50 G03 X 60 Y 50 G98 LO G98 L3 G01 G42 X 90 Y 50 I1 65 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 G98 LO IN99999 96 5822 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Fig 8 25 Fig 9 26 Nee Overlapping islands area of exclusion Overlapping islands area of intersection 8 25 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Example Overlapping pockets and islands PGM S824l is similar to PGM S820I but adds the islands C and D Tool Center cut end mill ISO 1641 radius 3 mm The contour is composed of the following
42. M94 Reduce display of rotary axis to value less than 360 e M95 Reserved M96 Reserved M97 Machine small contour steps e M98 Completely machine open contours e M99 Blockwise cycle call e M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired M102 Reset M101 e M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F percentage e M105 Machining with first Kv factor e M106 Machining with second Kv factor e M107 Suppress error message for replacement tool with oversize M108 Reset M107 e M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs increase and decrease feed rate M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs feed rate decrease only e M111 Reset M109 M110 M112 Automatic insertion of rounding arcs at non tangential straight line transitions Enter tolerance T for contour deviation e M113 Reset M112 e M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry during operation with tilting axes M115 Reset M114 e M116 Feed rate for angular axes in mm min e M126 Optimized traverse of rotary axes M127 Reset M126 k The miscellaneous functions M105 and M106 are defined and enabled by the machine tool builder Please refer to your machine manual for more information Page 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 8 3 0750 5539 9 39 5 43 5 37 5 38 8 3 4 16 4 16 5 40 0 41 0 41 0 41 0 41 5 42 5 43 5 44
43. N170 G90 G25 R7 5 N180 L Z 20 N190 G25 R7 5 N200 C 40 N210 G98 LO End of subprogram N99999 CYLSURF G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 41 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Once a contour has been programmed it can be positioned on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The following cycles are available for this DATUM SHIFT 653 654 MIRROR IMAGE G28 ROTATION G73 SCALING G72 The original contour must be marked in the part program as a subprogram or a program section Duration of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined and remains in effect until it is changed or cancelled Cancellation Coordinate transformations can be cancelled in the following ways e Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 e Execute a miscellaneous function MO2 or M30 or an N99999 95 block depending on machine parameters e Select a new program Fig 8 44 Examples of coordinate transformations 9 42 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations DATUM SHIFT G54 Z Application A datum shift allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece Y Z R X Activation t un X When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data are based on the new datum The datum shift is shown
44. N230 035 Q6 Q5 O7 Calculate angle increment end angle to starting angle divided by the number of steps N240 0 36 Q5 Set current angle for calculation starting angle N250 Q37 0 Set counter for milled steps N2604 021 291253 0090236 Calculate X coordinate for starting point N270 022 04 SIN Q36 Calculate Y coordinate for starting point N280 G00 G40 G90 X 021 Y 022 M3 Move to starting point in the plane N290 Z Q12 Rapid traverse in Z to setup clearance N300 G01 Z Q9 FQ10 Plunge to milling depth at plunging feed rate N310 G98 L1 N320 Q36 Q36 Q35 Update the angle N330 037 Q37 1 Update the counter N340 021 03 COS 036 Calculate the next X coordinate N350 Q22 Q4 SIN 036 Calculate the next Y coordinate N360 G01 X O21 Y Q22 FQ11 Move to next point N370 D12 P01 037 P02 Q7 P031 Not finished N380 G73 G90 H 0 Reset rotation N390 G54 Reset datum shift N400 GOO G40 G90 Z 012 Move in Z to setup clearance N410 G98 LO End of subprogram N99999 ELLIPSE G71 7 30 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 9 Programming Examples Hemisphere machined with end mill Notes on the program The tool moves upward in the Z X plane You can enter an oversize in block 12 Q12 If you want to machine the contour in several steps The tool radius is automatically compensated with parameter Q108 The program works with the following quantities e Solid angl
45. N40 T5 G17 S2000 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane N70 Z 15 MO3 Move tool to working depth move spindle to N80 G01 G42 X 5 Y 5 F200 contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate N90 X495 First straight line for corner E N100 G24 R10 Insert chamfer with length 10 mm N110 Y 100 Second straight line for corner E N120 GOO G40 X 110 Y 110 Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N130 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 9655141 G71 5 14 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Circles and circular arcs Here the TNC moves two axes simultaneously in a circular path relative to the workpiece Fig 5 19 Circular arc and circle center Circle center I J K You can define the circle center for circular move ment A circle center also serves as reference pole for polar coordinates Fig 5 20 Circle center coordinates Direction of rotation When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the mathematical direction of rotation e Clockwise direction of rotation is mathematically negative GO2 e Counterclockwise direction of rotation is mathematically positive GO3 Fig 5 21 Direction of rotation for circular movement TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 15 5 Programming Tool Movements
46. Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Rounding a corner Coordinates of the corner point Rounding radius Milling depth Tool radius Part program 59271671 Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Define the workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T7 L 0 R 10 Define the tool N40 T7 G17 S1500 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane N70 Z 15 MO3 Move the tool to working depth N80 G01 G42 X 0 Y 5 F100 Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate N90 X 95 First straight line for the corner N100 G25 R20 Insert a tangential arc with radius R 20 mm between the contour elements N110 Y 100 Second straight line for the corner N120 GOO G40 X 120 Y 120 Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N130 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 9655271 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 27 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Polar coordinates are useful with e Positions on circular arcs e Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees Polar coordinates are explained in detail in the section Fundamentals of NC page 1 12 Polar coordinate origin Pole I J K The pole can be defined anywhere in the program before blocks containing polar coordinates Similar to a circle center the pole is defined in an J K block usin
47. Q parameters when a program is selected and with M02 M30 N99999 5 Reset status display when a program is selected 6 Reset status display when a program is selected and with M02 M30 N99999 7 Graphic display mode MP7310 Projection in 3 planes according to ISO 6433 projection method 1 0 Projection in 3 planes according to ISO 6433 projection method 2 7 Do not rotate coordinate system for graphic display 40 Rotate coordinate system for graphic display by 90 2 Display new BLK FORM in Gb4 DATUM SHIFT referenced to previous datum 0 Display new BLK FORM in G54 DATUM SHIFT referenced to new datum 4 Do not show cursor position during projection in 3 planes mode 0 Show cursor position during projection in 3 planes mode 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 11 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis Tool radius MP7315 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis Penetration depth MP7316 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis M function for start MP7317 0 0 to 88 0 Function inactive Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis M function for end MP7317 1 0 to 88 0 Function inactive Determine the TNC program memory to be occupied during blockwise transfer MP7228 0 Minimum program memory to be used 1 to 1024 kilobytes MP7228 1 Maximum program memor
48. Q4A eere Shift datum to center of sphere ZC OG FO FEET eaae a a ia Rotation for program start starting plane angle N270 I 0 J 0 N280 G11 R 024 H Q6 FOTI ooo cece cee Pre positioning before machining N290 G98 L1 NSOO FOTOS CIO Pm Set pole X Z plane N310 G01 Y 0 Z 0 FQ11 esseere Pre positioning at each arc beginning N320 G98 L2 N330 G11 R 04 H Q21 FO11 N340 D02 Q21 P01 021 P02 Q3 oe Mill the sphere upward until the highest point is reached N350 D11 P01 021 PO2 Q2 P032 N360 G11 R O4 H 02 ssesssssseHRHH Mill the highest point on the sphere NS70 GOO m ou P EDT Retract in Z 150 B Retract in X N390 D01 Q26 P01 026 P02 08 oo Prepare the next rotation increment N400 DOO 021 POT FOT 9 sesssbersie tret bte es ob Ee trbhs Reset solid angle for machining to the starting value NATO G73 G90 H 026 7L uses sextae hte tabetutin iran sab Activate rotation for next operation N420 D12 P01 026 P02 Q7 P031 N430 D09 P01 026 PO2 Q7 POB 1 LL Rotate the coordinate system around the Z axis until the end plane angle is reached N440 G73 G90 HJO sss Reset rotation N450 G54 X 0 Y O Z 0 sessssseeRRRR Reset data shift NAGO COS LO Ren End of subprogram N99999 S712 71 7 32 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 1 General Overview of Cycles Frequently recurring machining sequences that comprise several working steps are stored in the control memory as sta
49. Repeats 6 4 Nesting Repeating program section repeats Program layout To REPS G71 2 e g NIS G9811 2j eg N20 G98 F2 MI pM USUS The program section between this block and G98 L2 block 20 Is repeated twice euge No ovas Ee ER The program section between this block and G98 L1 block 15 is repeated once N99999 REPS G71 Program execution 1ststep Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2nd step Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice 3rd step Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4th step Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once bth step Repetition of the second step within step 4 6th step Repetition of the third step within step 4 7th step Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 End of program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 11 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Repeating subprograms Program structure UPGREP G71 egy NO EGIS E ETA Be ae oe er im 2X 3 B Call subprogram NF eile 2d ac tree nce ey cata Program section repeat eg N19 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 ee Last program block of main program with M2 W20 GIBA A Start of subprogram e0 N29 Ra L t End of subprogram NS999999 Fo UUPGREP GZT rasinis ia End of main program Program execution 1st step Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2nd
50. TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a full circle Circle center coordinates Radius Milling depth Tool radius Part program 55321 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T25 L 0 R 15 N40 T25 G17 1500 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N60 I 50 J 50 N70 G10 R 70 H 280 N80 Z 5 M03 N90 G11 G41 R 50 H 90 F100 N100 G26 R10 N110 G12 H 270 N120G27 R10 N130 G10 G40 R 70 H 110 N140 Z 100 M02 IN99999 9555321 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane with polar coordinates Move tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Soft tangential approach Circle to end point H 270 negative direction of rotation Soft tangential departure Depart contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 9 91 D Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates G16 Circular path with tangential transition Moving on a circular path the tool transitions tangentially to the previous contour element 1 to at 2 Input e Polar coordinate angle H of the arc end point e Polar coordinate radius R of the arc end point E Fig 5 39 Circular pa
51. TNC memory or transfer them to a PC the TNC stores the data in the file D16RUN A output in program run mode or in the file D16SIM A output in test run mode You can define the output format by programming a text file Example D16 P01 TNC MASK MASK1 A Example of a text file to define the output format TEST RECORD BUCKET WHEEL GRAVITY CENTER NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 4 3LF Q31 Y1 4 3LF Q32 DA Te2P Qa 14 X XXX OX X X X 0X 0X 0X 0X o0X 0X 0X 3X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X X 03 0X 0X 0X X 0X 0X X 0X X X X X X X Xo XxXxxxg Associated file D16SIM A TEST RECORD BUCKET WHEEL GRAVITY CENTER NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 KHKKKRKKKRKKKKRKKKKKRKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKKEKE X1 149 360 1 25 509 Li 37 KHKKKRKKKKKKKRKKKKKRKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKRKKKRKKKKRKKKKRKKEKE Special character Function ET Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 4 3LF Define format for variables long floating 4 places before and 3 places behind the decimal point Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 17 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Reading system data E Dig 415 S S DATUM ee READ 325 With the function D18 SYS DATUM READ you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group number and additionally through a nu
52. To activate the stopwatch function E Press the shift keys until the soft key row with the stopwatch E SE functions appears Qo at The soft keys available to the left of the stopwatch function depend on the selected display mode 1 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Stopwatch functions Store displayed time Show the sum of the stored time and the displayed time Clear displayed time RESET aagzmgasama During a program run mode of operation the status 43805 G71 display contains the current coordinates and the N10 G30 G17 X40 VO 2 40 following information MAUI N30 G99 T1 L R 5 c N46 T1 Gi S1500 e Type of position display ACTL NOML aeaa md Gag boe e Number of the current tool T N60 G75 PO1 2 PO2 20 P 3 10 PO4 100 e Tool axis POS X 80 POG V 50 PO 500 e Spindle speed S N 0 X 50 Y 50 M3 e Feedrate F m Active M functions RCTL 132 6870 Y 12 5600 e Control in operation symbol 2 160 2560 B 30 0000 e Axis is locked symbol C 90 0000 e Axis can be moved with the handwheel T 9 M 5 9 e Axes are moving in a tilted working plane BG ol E el e Axes are moving under a basic rotation m a SA M OFF ON Fig 1 29 Status display in a program run mode of operation Additional status displays The additional status displays contain further information on the program run To select additional status d
53. Tool axis Tool length and radii Oversizes delta values Tool life maximum tool life and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL Display of the programmed tool and the next replacement tool Main program name Coordinates of the datum shift Angle of basic rotation Mirrored axis Scaling factor s Scaling datum conversational programming only Tool measurement only available with conversational programming PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Bt eee TCH PROBE 32 0 CRL TOOL RRDIUS TCH PROBE 32 1 CHECK 77 ain TCH PROBE 32 2 HEIGHT 30 R MAX DYN TCH PROBE 32 3 PROBING THE EDGES 1 END PGM MESS MM 0 9608 1 0839 C 2 0487 T 1 Z F PAGE PAGE BEGIN END RESTORE 1 ll POS RT TEXT TEXT E TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 8 4171 1 8 7554 8 8964 1 0674 1 0849 M 5 9 u TOOL OF F ON TRBLE Number of the tool to be measured Measured MIN and MAX values of the single cutting edges and the result of measuring the rotating tool Display whether the tool radius or the tool length is being measured Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is followed by an asterisk the allowable tolerance defined in the tool table was exceeded 1 29 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 th software TNC EXE Programs texts and tables are written as files and stored on the TNC s hard disk File identification PROG
54. Values 7 4 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions 7 7 a 5 arrester E a anette dieta dveraicaeddna cota dea tata conde T a 7 7 7 3 Trigonometric Functions cccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeaeesanees 7 10 i s H u n ABT 7 10 7 4 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters eene 7 11 god 7 11 a1 MEC 7 11 7 5 Checking and Changing Q Parameters 7 13 7 6 Diverse Functions cccccccceceececeseecuceseueuseveueusaveusuvaveusevaueusersusenenees 7 14 Displaying error Messages siipra fa oramai at EE RUP Oa minia AGRO ONERE ce tha 7 14 Output through an external data interface ssssssssssssses eee 7 16 Formatted output of texts and Q parameter values ccccccccceceeceeeeeeeesese sees eeanes 7 17 Reading Systeri Cd 8 vexixreet rbi rbi dA T hne Ta i pk adhi uk Gab bir RA ak ics pta 7 18 Transiter to the PUO acarane eda Pa a a a AE a iai a EE aE i 7 19 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly eere eene 7 20 Overview OF UCTS queste satasabbeiwbinstndd tii vicis nina dior dde da EDU Fat UNES bra ad nite 7 20 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run 7 23 7 9 Programming Examples
55. WORD Finding the current word You can search for the next occurrence of the word in which the cursor is presently located Exercise Find the word TOOL in the file ABC A Move the cursor to the word TOOL Select the search function FIND TEXT TOOL Search for the current word TOOL To find any text Select the search function FIND TEXT Enter the text that you wish to find Find the text EXECUTE To leave the search function Terminate the search function TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 31 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files To erase and insert characters words and lines DELETE DELETE DELETE RES TORE CHAR WORD LINE LINE LIORD Move the cursor to the text that you wish to erase or to the place where you wish to insert text Function Soft key Delete a character DELETE CHAR Delete and temporarily store a word DELETE WORD Delete and temporarily store a line DELETE LINE Insert a line word from temporary storage RESTORE LINE WORD Exercise Delete the first line of ABC A and insert it behind BY LUNCH Move the cursor to any position in the line JOBS Shift the soft key row DELETE Delete the line and store temporarily LINE n Move the cursor to the beginning of the line behind BY LUNCH cC RESTORE Insert the line JOBS at the cursor position L IME LORD at Temporarily stored words and lines can be inserted as often as desired
56. Y 52 M3 e Enter your comment and conclude the block by oe eae MSS ressing the END key k P 9 y G98 L1 G91 X 10 M99 To add a comment to a block that has already been L1 7 entered select the block and press a horizontal G9 X 100 Y 50 arrow key until the semicolon and the dialog prompt GOO 24100 appear X 150 Y 25 5 G84 P 1 2 P 2 20 PO0S3 O P0O4 250 Z 2 M3 M99 PARA METER Fig 4 19 Dialog for entering comments To enter a comment as a separate block Start a new block by pressing the semicolon key Enter your comment with the alphabetic and numeric keypads 3 Close the block al Comments are added behind the entered blocks Example N50 GOO X 0 Y 10 PRE POSITIONING A comment is indicated by a semicolon at the beginning of the block N60 G01 G41 F100 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 37 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements Tool movements are always programmed as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains Stationary uit Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece Radius compensation and a path function must remain active Example NC block N30 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 Path functions Each element of the workpiece contour is entered separately using path functions You enter e Straight lines e Circular arcs You can also program a combination
57. Y Q22 Intermediate positioning for second measurement N110 G55 P01 20 P02 Z X Q21 Y OQ22 Z Q23 Probe in negative direction store Z coordinate in Q20 second point N120 D02 Q1 P01 Q20 P02 O10 Measure height of island and assign to O1 N130 G38 Program stop Q1 can be checked see also page 7 13 N140 Z 100 MO2 Retract in the infeed axis and end the program N99999 9687171 G71 7 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Rectangular pocket with island corner rounding and tangential approach Pocket center coordinates 50 mm Q1 50 mm Q2 Pocket length 90 mm Q3 Pocket width 70 mm Q4 Working depth 2915 mm O5 Corner radius 10 mm Q6 Milling feed rate 200 mm min Q7 Part program 205927 Gil Start of program N10 DOO Q1 P01 N20 DOO Q2 P01 50 N30 DOO Q3 P01 90 Assign pocket data to the O parameters N40 DOO Q4 P01 70 N50 DOO Q5 P01 15 N60 DOO Q6 P01 10 N70 DOO Q7 P01 200 N80 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N90 G31 X4100 Y 100 Z 0 N100 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 Define tool N110 T1G17 1000 Call tool N120 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool N130 D04 Q13 P01 03 P02 2 The length of the pocket is halved for the path of traverse in block N200 N140 D04 Q14 P01 04 P02 2 The width of the pocket is halved for the paths of traverse in blocks N220 N300 N150 D04 Q16 P01 O6 P02
58. arrow key to move the highlight bar to the desired drive Once the highlight bar is on desired drive confirm your selection with ENT To create a new directory Select the drive Press the downward arrow key to move the highlight to the directory under which you wish to open a new directory Enter the name of the new directory up to eight characters and confirm with ENT Answer the TNC dialog question with the YES soft key if you wish to create a new directory or abort with NO To select the directory Select the drive Press the downward arrow key to move the highlight to the desired directory In the right screen window the TNC automatically displays the files stored in this directory Or Press the leftward arrow key to move the highlight to the active directory left in the screen gt Enter the path directly with the ASCII keyboard and confirm with ENT TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 To select the file Select the drive Select the directory Press the rightward arrow key to move the highlight to the file directory Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to choose the file type see page 1 36 Press the downward or upward arrow key to move the highlight to the desired file Once the highlight is on the desired file confirm your selection with ENT or Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC then display
59. cycle definition not on TNC 426 Tolerance for rounding arc with M112 Feed rate Dwell time with G04 Scaling factor with G72 Preparatory function Angle for polar coordinates in incremental absolute dimensions Rotational angle with G73 SCE G oN a om CI UCI 49 T X coordinate of circle center pole Y coordinate of circle center pole Z coordinate of circle center pole Set label number with G98 Go to label number Tool length with G99 Miscellaneous function Block number Cycle parameter in fixed cycles Parameter in parameter definitions Program parameter cycle parameter O Polar coordinate radius Circle radius with G02 G03 G05 Rounding radius with G25 G26 G27 Chamfer with G24 Tool radius with G99 Spindle speed Oriented spindle stop with G36 Tool definition with G99 Tool call Linear motion parallel to the X axis Linear motion parallel to the Y axis Linear motion parallel to the Z axis X axis Y axis Z axis End of block TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 99 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 Address Letters ISO Parameter definitions 11 34 D 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 I9 14 15 16 18 19 Function Assignment Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Square root Sine Cosine Root sum of squares c V a b If equal jump If not equal jump If greater than jump If less than jump Angle angle from c
60. determined as follows E x dl where n is the number of thread revolutions and P is the thread pitch Radius compensation Int Ithread Work directi Rotati Radi Enter the radius compensation for the helix dii cuiii sisi pedi Edu ere ee according to the table at right Right handed Z G13 G41 Left handed G12 G42 Right handed G12 G42 Left handed G13 G41 External thread Rotation Radius comp Right handed G13 G42 Left handed G12 G41 Right handed G12 G41 Left handed G13 G42 Fig 5 41 The shape of the helix determines the direction of rotation and the radius compensation TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Sco D Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates To program a helix Gy 2 Helix clockwise Ce EX Enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions here H 1080 HEDOU Enter the height of the helix in the tool axis likewise in incremental dimensions here Z 4 5 mm Confirm your entry Further entries if necessary Radius compensation Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G12 G91 H 1080 Z44 5 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Example for exercise Tapping Given data Thread Right handed internal thread M64 x 1 5 Pitch P t5 mm Starting angle A Om End angle A 360 0 at Z 0 Thread revolutions n 8
61. disk Input resolution 0 1 um 0 1 um 0 1 um 0 1 um TNC 407 Analog 24 ms 6ms 128 K byte 1 um TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series Visual display unit and keyboard The 14 inch color monitor displays all the information necessary for effective use of the TNC s capabilities The keys are grouped on the keyboard according to function This makes it easier to create programs and to use the TNC s functions Programming The TNCs are programmed in ISO format It is also possible to program in easy to understand HEIDENHAIN conversational format a separate User s Manual is available for this Graphics Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated both during machining except on TNC 407 or before actual machining Various display modes are available Compatibility The TNCs can execute all part programs written on HEIDENHAIN TNC 150 B controls or later TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 3 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series Keyboard The keys on the TNC keyboard are marked with symbols and abbrevia tions that make them easy to remember They are grouped according to the their functions The functions of the individual keys are described in the front cover fold out of the TNC user s manual A description of machine panel buttons is provided in the manual for your machine tool The keyboard of TNC 407 TNC 415 and TNC 425 controls Typewriter style keyboa
62. during projection in 3 planes The TNC shows the coordinates of the cursor position at the bottom of the graphics window Only the coordinates of the working plane are shown This function is activated with machine parameter MP 7310 Cursor position during detail magnification During detail magnification the TNC displays the coordinates of the axis that is currently being moved 19 X 26 6 V 35 3 FESE mE ipe 00 00 00 The coordinates describe the area determined for wt cr Bk 00 magnification To the left of the slash is the smallest coordinate of the detail in the current axis Fig 1 24 The coordinates of the cursor position are displayed to the lower left of the graphic to the right is the largest 3D view Here the workpiece is displayed in three dimensions and can be rotated about the vertical axis The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation In the TEST RUN mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification 0 a STATUS START STOP RESET CW C SINGLE AT START OFF ON o M START Fig 1 25 3Dview TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 laze 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays To rotate the 3D view a 3 Shift the soft key row RESET psi psi SHOU OMIT SIUNE ini o o wi ed BLK FORM BLK FORM D D T CO Rotate the workpiece in 27 steps about the vertical axis The cur
63. e ses ro With the WINDOW soft key you can change the screen layout see page 1 34 Whenever you press the PGM MGT key the TNC shows the screen layout that you last selected Drives File information In R823255 RS232 interface e FILE NAME m e BYTES RSn221 RS422 interface STATUS TNO amp TNC disk drive The active drive is shown in a different color The drive symbol depends on the selected interface mode see page 10 4 Directories e DATE e TIME 3 3D 3 BOHREN 3 KONET The TNC shows a subdirectory at the right of and below its parent directory The active directory is depicted in a different color and is indicated by an open file symbol TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Files stored in the active directory Size of the file in bytes The following letters may appear in the STATUS column E File is selected in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode S File is selected in the TEST RUN operating mode M File is selected in a program run operating mode P File is protected against editing and erasure IN File contains inch dimensions W File was incompletely transferred to external storage and cannot be run Date the file was last changed Time the file was last changed 1 31 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 To select the drive Press the leftward arrow key to move the highlight bar to the active directory left in the screen Press the upward
64. elements Two overlapping pockets A and B and two islands within the pockets C and D Cycle in a part program 7098241 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 S2500 N50 G37 PO1 1 P02 2 PO3 3 P044 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 10 PO3 5 P04 100 P05 2 P06 0 P07 500 N70 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N80 X450 Y 50 MOS N90 Z 2 M99 N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 N130 1 35 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N160 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N1701465 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 N180 G98 LO N190 G98 L3 N200 G01 G41 X4 27 Y 42 N210 58 N220 X 43 N230 Y 42 N240 X 27 N250 G98 LO N260 G98 L4 N270 G01 G42 X 57 Y 42 N280 X 73 N290 X 65 Y 58 N300 X 57 Y 42 N310 G98 LO N99999 9658241 G71 8 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Fig 8 27 Milling of outline Fig 8 28 Finished workpiece PILOT DRILLING G56 This cycle performs pilot drilling of holes for cutter infeed at the starting points of the subcontours With SL contours consisting of several overlap ping pockets and Islands the cutter infeed point is the starting point of the first subcontour e he tool is positioned at setup clearance over the first infeed point e The drilling sequence is identical to fixed Cycle G83 PECKING e he tool is then positioned above the second infeed point and the
65. files If the highlight is at left only TNC files are displayed If the highlight is at right only externally stored files are displayed TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 Fo 9 External Data Transfer 9 2 Data Transfer with the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Transferring files from an external device to the TNC Use the cursor key to move the highlight to a file that is stored in the external device Function Soft key Transfer selected file TRANSFER TNC a EXT Transfer all files TRANSFER a THC EXT Select files consecutively for individual TRANSFER transfer Press ENT to transfer T otherwise press NO ENT THC EXT Interrupt transfer You can interrupt data transfer by pressing the END key or the END soft key at e f the TNC recognizes erroneously transferred program blocks it will mark them with ERROR These blocks must then be corrected in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode e f you want to transfer files between two TNCs start transmission from the receiving TNC Blockwise transfer FULL SEQUENCE The menu to the right is for blockwise transfer see FILE NAME HIHEEEENENEEEENN page 3 11 First select as usual the name of the file RS232 FE1 H SECTORS STATUS to be transferred blockwise Then start data aS transfer with the SELECT soft key 1 ZH H H H H H H eH H H H H d 1 1 1 1 1 2 9 1 1 1 46 FILE S 680 SECTORS VACANTT PAGE PAGE SELECT SELECT
66. for machine movements machining modes and one for programming or program testing programming modes TNC 426 The TNC 426 PA features digital control of machine axis speed This provides high geometrical accuracy even with complex workpiece surfaces and at high machining speeds An integrated 170 megabyte hard disk provides storage for programs that were created on external devices The TNC 426 also offers an on screen pocket calculator TNC 425 The TNC 425 also features digital control of machine axis speed This results in high geometrical accuracy even with complex workpiece surfaces and at high machining speeds TNC 415 B The TNC 415 B uses an analog method of speed control in the drive amplifier All the programming and machining functions of the TNC 425 are also available on the TNC 415 B TNC 407 The TNC 407 uses an analog method of speed control in the drive amplifier Some functions are not available on the TNC 407 such as e Graphics during program run e ilting the machining plane e inear movement in more than three axes Technical differences between the TNCs TNC 426 PA TNC 426 CA TNC 425 TNC 415 B opeed control Digital Analog Digital analog Analog Block processing time 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms Control loop cycle time Contouring interpolation 3 ms 3 ms 3 ms 2 ms Control loop cycle time Fine interpolation 0 6 ms 0 6 ms 0 6 ms Program memory 170 M byte 170 M byte 256 K byte 256K byte hard disk hard
67. is tilted The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that is tilted relative to the main plane Typical applications e Oblique holes e Contours in an oblique plane There are two ways to tilt the working plane e 3D ROT soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL operation modes e Cycle G80 WORKING PLANE in the part program see page 8 55 The tilting functions are coordinate transformations The transformed tool axis i e as calculated by the TNC always remains parallel to the actual tool axis the axis being positioned The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types e Machines with tilting tables e Machines with swivel heads Machines with tilting tables e You must bring the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with a GOO block e The position of the transtormed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate f you press the Z axis direction button in the MANUAL OPERATION mode the tool moves in Z direction e n calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the par
68. manager with END 9 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 1 Data Transfer with the TNC 426 To copy multiple files into the TNC Press PGM MGT to call the file manager Arrange the screen layout with the WINDOW soft key to show file names in both halves of the screen see Chapter 1 File management on the TNC 426 n the left screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory into which you wish to copy the file from the external device Move the highlight to the right screen half with the rightward arrow key n the right screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory containing the files that you want to copy into the TNC Move the highlight to the first file you want to copy into the TNC Shift the soft key row Select the file tagging function with the TAG soft key Press the TAG FILE soft key The TNC tags the highlighted file Move the highlight to the next file you want to copy Tag the file with TAG FILE Tag all files you want to copy in this way Press the COPY TAG soft key and confirm with ENT Die TNC copies the tagged files into the TNC Close the file manager with END Copying files out of the TNC If you want to copy files out of the TNC tag the files in the left half of the screen and copy them into the external device If you only want to copy a single file into or out of the TNC use the COPY soft key after you have mov
69. number Set data interface Graphic display of the workpiece blank in the working area of the machine CODE NUMBER aa Machine specific user parameters HELP files if provided NC SOFTWARE NUMBER 259930 075S PLC SOFTWARE NUMBER 252499 1 RS 232 DATUM USER 0 RS 422 Fig 10 2 MOD functions in the TEST RUN mode In all other modes MANUAL OPERATION Unit of measurement mm or inch AXIS SELECTION 4511111 Programming language HEIDENHAIN or ISO Selecting the axes for generating L blocks conversational programming only e Display NC software number e Display PLC software number POSITION DISPLRY 1 e Display code digits for installed options Sandee ds on vin e Select position display PROGRAM INPUT HEIDENHRIN 9 e e ir NC SOFTURRE NUMBER 280462 00H Axis traverse limits PLC SOFTURRE NUMBER Display datums OPT 00000011 Display machining time HELP files if provided POSITION AXIS MACHINE Fig 10 3 MOD functions in a machine operating mode 10 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD Functions To select the MOD functions If necessary Change to the desired mode of operation ae Select MOD functions To change the MOD functions Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired MOD function Page through the MOD functions until you find the desired function ENT Repeatedly Enter the appropriate numbers and confirm e
70. of the tool relative to the workpiece 4 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming i one PEN NG G28 X PROGRAMS 3813 With the CALC key you can open an additional H aaa T DRTUM SHIFT SOTSTTUN i gt M window for performing calculations ori QR one EA N10 GOG G40 G90 2 025 M3 B PEN ID MIRROR IMAGE The calculator is operated with short commands N20 DOO 052 P01 0 we ox through the ASCII keyboard The commands are N30 D1 053 PO1 03 PO2 023 SCALING shown in a special color in the calculator window N49 001 068 Pat 06 Paz 0108 ta anna FN a aiina The calculator can perform the following mathemati aaan ti NGG DO4 Q 2 PO1 012 PO2 026 RC SIN COS TAN 7 Ca Opera IONS N70 DO3 072 PO1 072 PO2 029 4 N80 D02 Q PO1 01 PO2 07 X Y SOR 1 X 1 N90 DO Q PO1 077 PO2 027 0 N100 D 3 Q PO1 077 PO2 029 N118 D 2 Q 8 PO1 018 P 2 08 COORD PGM POS TOOL TRANSF Fig 4 16 The TNC s pocket calculator Mathematical function Command Addition Subtraction Multiplication x Division Sine Cosine Tangent Arc sine AS Arc cosine AC Arc tangent AT Powers ji Square root Q Inversion Parenthetic calculations T 3 14159265359 P Display result To move the pocket calculator gt Press the arrow keys To close the pocket calculator Press the CALC key again Example Find the sine of 30 and multiply by 50 Press the CALC key Enter the numb
71. of the two contour elements helical paths Fig 5 1 A contour consists of straight lines and circular arcs The contour elements are executed In sequence to machine the programmed contour Fig 5 2 Contour elements are programmed and executed in sequence 5 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat Programming variants e Repeating a machining routine immediately after it is executed program section repeat e nserting a machining routine at certain locations in a program subprogram e Calling a separate program for execution or test run within the main program program call Cycles Common machining routines are delivered with the control as standard cycles for e Peck drilling e Tapping e Slot milling e Pocket and island milling Coordinate transformation cycles can be used to change the coordinates of a machining sequence in a defined way Examples Datum shift Mirroring Basic rotation Enlarging and reducing Parametric programming Instead of programming numerical values you enter markers called parameters which are defined through mathematical functions or logical
72. on the hard disk of the TNC We recommend to save newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals You can do this with the cost free backup program TNCBACK EXE from HEIDENHAIN In addition you need a floppy disk on which all machine specific data such as PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Please contact your machine manufacturer for more information on both the backup program and the floppy disk saving the entire hard disk 170 M bytes may take several hours In this case it is a good idea to save the data outside of work hours e g during the night TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 Calling the file manager Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager The screen will then look something like this Active path or Misi ak PROGRAMMING AND EDITING FILE NAME a file name B LULES TNC TES TSHDHSKONTURSAL T H Drives a RS232 FILE NAME BYTE STATUS DATE TIME File information m RS422 21000 28 02 2006 08 26 E TNC 21010 28 02 2006 08 26 21020 28 02 2006 08 26 O TEST 21030 28 02 2006 08 26 4 HDH 21040 28 02 2006 08 26 4 KONTUR 21041 28 02 2006 08 26 Files stored in the ALT lt 21050 28 02 2006 08 26 active directory Directories 21060 28 02 2006 08 26 21070 28 02 2006 08 26 56 21080 28 02 2006 08 26 58 21090 28 02 2006 08 26 58 113 FILES 31516 KBYTE VACANT PRGE PRGE SELECT COPY SELECT M INDOL eej
73. or 0 0001 Example D19 P01 10 P02 03 The numerical value 10 means 1 um or 0 001 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Index System data CO N01 i C050 Basic rotation in MANUAL mode Rotation programmed with Cycle 10 Active mirror axis 0 mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored 8 IV axis mirrored 16 V axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in IV axis Active scaling factor in V axis 3D ROT A axis 3D ROT B axis 3D ROT C axis 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations either by soft key or directly from the ASCII keyboard We recommend entering the operations by soft key since this eliminates the possibility of syntax errors Overview of functions Mathematical function Soft key Addition Example Q10 Q1 O5 Subtraction Example Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 Q5 Division Example 025 Q1 Q2 Open parentheses Example Q12 O1 O2 Q3 Close parentheses Example Q12 O1 O2 Q3 Square Example Q15 SO 5 Square root Example Q22 SORT 25 SORT Sine of an angle Example 044 SIN 45 SIN Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 cos Tangent of an angle Example O46 TAN 45 TAN 7 20
74. point is approached without radius compensation Ig 5 9 Common starting and end point TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 925 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure Tangential approach and departure The tool approaches the contour on a tangential arc with G26 and departs it with G27 This prevents dwell marks Starting point and end point Starting point and end point of the machining sequence are off the workpiece near the first or last contour element The tool path to the starting point or end point is programmed without radius compensation Input e For the approach path G26 is programmed after the block containing the first contour point the first block with radius compensation G41 Fig 5 9 Soft contour approach G42 e For the departure path G27 is programmed after the block containing the last contour point the last block with radius compensation G41 G42 Fig 5 10 Soft contour departure Program structure Starting point First contour point Soft approach Last contour point Soft departure End point at The radius in G26 G27 must be selected such that it is possible to perform the circular arc between the contour point and the starting point or end point 5 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 3 Path Functions General information Part program input You create a part program by entering the work
75. previous basic rotation Set the ROTATION ANGLE to the value you wrote down previously To measure the angle between two sides of a workpiece Fig 2 20 Measuring the angle between two sides of a workpiece Select the probing function with the PROBING ROT soft key Ke ROT ROTATION ANGLE If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the value that appears under ROTATION ANGLE Make a basic rotation for the first side see Compensating workpiece misalignment Probe the second side as for a basic rotation but do not set the ROTATION ANGLE to zero PROBING The angle PA between the two sides appears under ROTATION ls ROT ANGLE Cancel the basic rotation To restore the previous basic rotation Set the ROTATION ANGLE to the value you wrote down previously TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2229 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane E T The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder On the TNC 426 the machine tool builder also determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as solid angles Your machine manual provides more detailed information on this subject qi The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The TNC supports machine tools with swivel heads the tool is tilted and or tilting tables the workpiece
76. program BEGIN TERT Go to the end of the program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 3 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run In the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop In the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START BUTTON The following functions can be used during a program run Interrupt program run Start program run from a certain block Blockwise transfer of very long programs from external storage Block skip Editing and using the tool table TOOL T Checking changing Q parameters Graphic simulation Additional status display To run a part program e Clamp the workpiece to the machine table e Set the datum e Select the necessary tables and pallet files gt PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK or PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Select the part program and the necessary tables and pallet files in the file directory O Go to the first block of the program Run the program Only in mode Run each block of the part program separately PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK D for each block at You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs 3 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Interrupting machining There are several ways to interrupt a program run e Programmed interru
77. step Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3rd step Program section from block 12 to block 10 is repeated twice so subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4th step Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program 6 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 2 uU Q Parameters are used for e Programming families of parts e Defining contours through mathematical functions An entire family of parts can be programmed on the TNC with a single part program You do this by entering variables called O parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters are designated by the letter Q and a number between 0 and 299 Meaning Range Freely applicable parameters locally effective depending on MP7251 QO to Q99 Parameters for special functions of the TNC Q100 to 0199 Additional parameters only available on TNC 426 Parameters that are primarily used for cycles globally effective Q200 to 0299 Q parameters can represent information such as coordinate values feed rates rom cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined through mathematical functions In addition you can use Q parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on certain logical conditions You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a pro gram Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 99
78. tilted plane tool axis the axis being positioned The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types e Machines with tilting tables e Machines with swivel heads Machines with tilting tables e You must bring the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with a GOO block e The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate If you press the Z axis direction button in the MANUAL OPERATION mode the tool moves in Z direction e n calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 55 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles Machines with swivel heads e You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with a GOO block e The position of the transformed tool axis like the position of the tool changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates als
79. vx Kcd o ar te nc ri 2 4 POSITIONING wit manualdata mnput MD I oiii hiicitit oce dirt iR diri pida 2 4 2 2 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 2 5 TO enter the spIndi SDBOU D excitement euxdeatituraliiec acutius E Quer aeia eaaa E Ne 2 b To change the spindle speed S meme nnns 2 5 To change the feed rate F oaescendesseti cane nedadontsuathacnban ante celeecaiganieasanettinntennite erseetabeaaeeties 2 6 To enter a miscellaneous function Mo ccc c ce ccccccecceeeceee cece Hm emnes 2 6 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe 2 7 Seting the datum n the TOO axis eiciia nerasi sue n Eco dv BER pei tire aint n Bu m Fere 2 7 To set the datum in the working plane sessssssss enn 2 8 2 4 3D Touch Probes seeseeeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nnne 2 9 SD Touch probe applicati ONS seitan inini aaa aiaiai 2 9 To select the touch probe functions sssssssssse menn 2 9 Calibraundg tie 3D WOU PrODG ccs esc clase tern ipu ou tia ln mta quiste puce s EEEa 2 10 Compensating workpiece misalignment ssssssssses enne 2 12 25 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe 2 14 TO Sete datum ME aN S XIS ecanitde eapite RUE ER a e xia Sn m PR Aine nadia 2 14 Comer as Qatu NR RRRK 2 15 Circle center as dat lTi u ies inse se bi hbri tob thee isbn KUPR UR br Pra br PR EEAO
80. 0 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 25 N40 T1 G17 S780 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N60 X 25 Y 30 N70 Z 18 MOS N80 G01 G42 X 0 Y 0 F100 N90 G02 X 100 Y 0 R 50 N100 GOO G40 X 70 Y 30 N110 Z 100 M02 N99999 S523 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane Move tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Mill arc to end point X 100mm Y 0 radius 50mm direction of rotation negative Depart the contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G06 Circular path with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts at a tangent with the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth Input Coordinates of the end point of the arc Prerequisites e The contour element to which the arc with GOG Fig 5 99 The straightline 1 2 is connected tangentially to the is to tangentially connect must be programmed circular arc S E directly before the GO6 block e Before the GO6 block there must be at least two positioning blocks defining the contour ele
81. 00 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 Define tool N40 T1 G17 S1500 Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 Retract in the infeed axis Version 1 unmirrored N70 G54 X 70 Y 60 Shift datum N80 G28 X Activate mirroring Version 2 shifted and mirrored N100 G28 Cancel mirroring N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 100 M02 N130 G98 L1 Same as subprogram on page 8 45 A250 G98 LO N99999 9658441 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 49 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations ROTATION G73 Application This cycle enables the coordinate system to be rotated about the active datum in the machining plane within a program Activation Rotation becomes active as soon as it is defined This cycle is also effective in the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL INPUT mode Reference axis for the rotation angle e X Y plane X axis e Y plane Y axis e X plane Z axis The active rotation angle is displayed in the additional status display Input data The rotation angle is entered in degrees Input range 360 to 360 absolute or incremental Cancellation Rotation is cancelled by entering a rotation angle of 0 Example Rotation A contour subprogram 1 is to be executed once as originally programmed referenced to the datum X 0 Y 0 and then rotated by 35 and referenced to the position X70 Y 60 Continued on next page 8 50 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordina
82. 1 Example of an open contour milling and finish milling operations al G125 CONTOUR TRAIN should not be used for closed contours With closed contours the starting point and end point of the contour must not be located in a contour corner Input data e MILLING DEPTH O1 Distance between workpiece surface and contour floor The sign determines the working direction a negative sign means negative working direction e ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q3 Finishing allowance in the machining plane e WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE Q5 Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the work piece datum e CLEARANCE HEIGHT Q7 Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for tool retraction at the end of the cycle e PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tool is plunged for each infeed e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the tool axis e FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane e CLIMB OR UP CUT Q15 Climb milling input value 1 Up cut milling input value 1 To enable climb milling and conventional up cut milling alternately in several infeeds input value O at e f Cycle G125 CONTOUR TRAIN is used only the first label from Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY will be processed e Each subprogram can contain up to 128 contour elements e Cycle G120 CONTOUR DATA is not required TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 37 8 Cycles 8 4
83. 121 Application Cycle G121 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE and the ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for milling Sequence same as Cycle G83 PECKING Input data e PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tool drills in each infeed Fig 8 39 Possible infeed point for negative sign for negative direction PILOT DRILLING e FEED RATE FOR PECKING O11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during drilling e ROUGH OUT TOOL NUMBER O13 Tool number of the roughing mill TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 33 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group ll ROUGH OUT G122 Sequence e The control positions the tool over the cutter infeed point e he ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE is taken into account e After reaching the first pecking depth the tool mills the contour in an outward direction at the programmed feed rate Q12 e First the island contours C and D in figure 8 40 are rough milled until the pocket contour A B is approached e hen the pocket contour is rough milled and the tool is retracted to the CLEARANCE HEIGHT Fig 8 40 Cutter path for ROUGH OUT Input data A and B are pockets C and D are e PECKING DEPTH O10 EDS Dimension by which the tool is plunged in each infeed negative sign for negative direction e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min d
84. 15 File name File type To open a new file you must enter a file name consisting of up to eight characters letters and numbers You can manage any number of files on the TNC s hard disk Their total size however must not exceed 170 M byte To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your hard disk into directories Directories work like drawers in a filing cabinet They enable you to save your files in groups according to some system You could set up your directories according to job number for example The name of a directory can have up to eight characters letters and numbers If you divide a directory up into further directories these subordinate directories are called subdirec tories The TNC shows subdirectories at the right of and below their parent directories See page 1 31 Data security The functions described in this chapter are valid for the hard disk of the TNC and for the FE1 interface mode see page 10 4 If you wish to use these functions with a personal computer you will need the HEIDENHAIN data transfer Files in the TNC Programs e in HEIDENHAIN plain language dialog e in SO format Tables for e Tools e Pallets e Datums e Points digitizing range for measuring touch probe Texts as e ASCII files Fig 1 35 Overview of file types in the TNC 426 AUFTR1 NCPROG WZTAB A35kK941 ZYLM TESTPROG HUBER KAR25T Fig 1 36 Directories
85. 160 G10 G40 R 70 H 170 N170 Z 100 M02 N99999 S530 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Set pole Pre position in the working plane with polar coordinates Move tool to working depth Move to contour point 1 Move to contour point 2 Move to contour point 3 Move to contour point 4 incremental dimensions Move to contour point 5 absolute dimensions Move to contour point 6 Move to contour point 1 Depart contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis D 9 0 G12 G13 G15 Circular path around pole I J K qi Permissible values for H 5b400 to 5400 Programming Tool Movements Path Contours Polar Coordinates The polar coordinate radius is also the radius of the arc It is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole Input e Polar coordinate angle H for the end point of the arc Fig 5 38 Circular path around a pole Defining the direction of rotation Direction of rotation e Clockwise G12 e Counterclockwise G13 e No definition G15 the last programmed direction of rotation is used Circle polar coordinates clockwise Enter angle H for the end point of the arc here H 30 Confirm entry Further entries if necessary Radius compensation R Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G12 H30 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B
86. 1650 1482 1100 Example FRESRDOR ERFG RS 422 EXT1 3 T is displayed This means that only those files are shown that have the extension T EM et ILI I and are located in an external storage device e g D a PC that is connected to the TNC over the D RS 422 interface see also Chapter 10 A R A soft key calls the file directory of an external 53 FILE S 155904 BYTES VACANT data storage medium The screen is then divided PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW into two columns tI o s L3 Ee Fig 1 41 Files are sorted alphabetically and according to type Select the file directory LJ INDO Show the file directory in one or two columns The selected layout is shown in the soft key TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 6 File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 File status The letters in the STATUS column give the following information about the files TI File is selected in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode File is selected in the TEST RUN operating mode File is selected in a program run operating mode File is protected against editing and erasure File contains inch dimensions File has been transferred to external storage and cannot be run 27 Selecting a file You must be in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Call the file manager with PGM NAME Display the file type soft key row with the SELECT TYPE so
87. 4 32 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files Editing text blocks With the editor text blocks sections of text of any size can be selected deleted inserted at the same or other locations copied even whole files a Sh 3 Shift the soft key row cC SELECT REMDUE INSERT risen BPPEND READ BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK TO FILE FILE Function To select a block Place the cursor at one end of the block and press SELECT BLOCK Then move the cursor to the other end The selected block has a different color than the rest of the text SELECT BLOCK Delete the selected text and store temporarily PEMOVE BLOCK Insert the temporarily stored text at the cursor location INSERT BLOCK o D lt Store marked block temporarily without erasing REMOVE INSERT BLOCK Transfer the selected text to another file Type the name of the target file in the screen dialog line and press ENT The TNC appends the selected text to the end of the specified file You can also create a new file with the selected text in this way APPEND TO FILE Insert another file at the cursor position READ Write the name of the source file in the screen dialog line and press ENT DUE TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 33 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files Exercise Move the last four lines in the file ABC A to the beginning of the file then copy them into a new file WZ A e Move the text to th
88. 40 G01 G41 X 5 Y 5 N250 X 105 N260 Y 105 N270 X 5 N280 Y 5 N290 G98 LO N99999 9658181 G71 Start of program Define workpiece blank In the CONTOUR GEOMETRY cycle state that the contour elements are described in subprograms 2 and 1 Cycle definition ROUGH OUT Retract in the infeed axis insert tool Pre position in X Y spindle ON Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call Subprogram 1 Geometry of the island radius compensation G42 and machining in counterclockwise direction the contour element is an island Subprogram 2 Geometry of the auxiliary pocket External boundary of the area to be machined radius compensation G41 and machining in counterclockwise direction the contour element is a pocket TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Overlapping contours Pockets and islands can also be overlapped to form a new contour The area of a pocket can thus be enlarged by another pocket or reduced by an Island Starting position Machining begins at the starting position of the first pocket listed in Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY The starting position should be located as far as possible from the superimposed contours Example Overlapping pockets The machining process starts with the first contour label defined in block 6 The first pocket must begin outside the second pocket Inside machining with a center cut end mill ISO 1641 tool radius 3 mm
89. 5 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes To calibrate the effective radius Position the ball tip in the bore hole of the ring gauge Compensating center misalignment After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be exactly aligned with the spindle axis The misalignment is measured with this calibration function and automatically compensated electronically For this operation the 3D touch probe is rotated by 180 The rotation is initiated by a miscellaneous function that is set by the machine tool builder in the machine parameter MP 6160 The center misalignment is measured after the effective ball tip radius is calibrated Fig 2 10 Calibrating the touch probe radius and determining center misalignment Select the calibrating function for the ball tip radius and the touch probe center misalignment MANUAL OPERATION X X Y Y TOOL AXIS Z RADIUS RING GAUGE 0 The touch probe contacts a position on the bore in each axis direction the effective ball tip radius is stored Determine the ball tip center misalignment or terminate the calibration function with END rotate the touch probe by 180 The touch probe contacts one position on the bore hole for each axis direction the touch probe center misalignment Is stored TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 11 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Displaying calibration values MANUAL OPERATION PROGRA
90. 7 1 BS 950 750 200 H7 1 2 450 750 200 H7 1 3 700 1225 400 H8 2 2 1 300 150 50 H11 2 2 2 300 0 50 H11 2 2 3 300 150 50 H11 3 3 1 250 0 26 3 32 250 30 26 3 33 250 60 26 3 3 4 250 90 26 3 CES 250 120 26 3 3 6 250 150 26 3 CN 250 180 26 3 3 8 250 210 26 3 3 9 250 240 26 3 CRI 250 270 26 3 3 11 250 300 QO 26 2 3 12 250 330 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 17 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Programming tool movements Position During workpiece machining an axis position is changed either by move ment of the tool or movement of the machine table on which the work piece Is fixed You always program as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary If the machine table moves the corresponding axes are identified on the machine operating panel with a prime mark e g X Y The programmed direction of such axis movement always corresponds to the direction of tool movement relative to the workpiece but in the opposite direction encoders Position encoders convert the movement of the machine axes into electrical signals The control constantly evaluates these signals to calculate the actual position of the machine axes If there is an interruption in power the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position When power is restored the TNC can re establish this relationship Reference marks Th
91. 7 and test run operating modes the TNC provides the following three display modes e Plan view e Projection in three planes e 3D view The display mode is selected with the soft keys On the TNC 415 B TNC 425 and TNC 426 workpiece machining can also be graphically simulated in real time The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined by a cylindrical end mill If tool tables are used a spherical cutter can also be depicted see page 4 10 The graphics window will not show the workpiece if e the current program has no valid blank form definition e no program is selected With machine parameters MP7315 to MP7317 a graphic is generated even if no tool axis is defined or moved The graphics cannot show rotary axis movements error message Graphics during program run E A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the B microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machin ing tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Stepover milling of the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however 1 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Plan view CE The depth of the workpiece surface is displayed according to the principle the deeper the darker The number of display
92. 7 2 271 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe X X Y Y Z Z Select the probe direction with the cursor keys same axis as for 1 or gt Probe the workpiece The value displayed as DATUM is the distance between the two points To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS F95 Probe the first touch point again Set the DATUM to the value that you wrote down previously Measuring angles You can also use the touch probe to measure angles in the working plane You can measure e the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece side or e the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 To find the angle between the angle reference axis and a side of the workpiece Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING ROT Ke ROT ROTATION ANGLE If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the value that appears under ROTATION ANGLE Make a basic rotation with the side of the workpiece see section Compensating workpiece misalignment 2 22 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe PROB ING Display the angle between the angle reference axis and the side of I ROT the workpiece as the ROTATION ANGLE Cancel the basic rotation To restore the
93. 72 QOX 21070 872 01 21080 21090 1078 012345 113 FILES 31516 KBYTE VACANT 195 FILES 31516 KBYTE VACANT PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT lJ INDO 1182 01234 To select the directory Press the leftward or rightward arrow key to switch to the window in which you wish to select a new directory Press the PATH soft key to switch to the path display The TNC then shows the drives active drive is depicted in a different color and the active directory also depicted in a different color f you wish to change drives press the upward arrow key to move the highlight to the new drive Once the highlight is on the desired drive confirm your selection with ENT The TNC automatically returns to the file display The window then shows the files stored in the uppermost directory of the selected drive f you wish to select a subdirectory press the PATH soft key to return to the path display Press the downward arrow key to move the highlight to the desired directory Once the highlight is on the desired directory confirm your selection with ENT The TNC then automatically switches back to the file window containing the files stored in the selected directory 1 34 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 Functions for file management The file management functions are selected by soft key after pressing PMG MGT in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation The
94. 7440 range datums 586 referencedtothe Z o Working space displayed workpiece blank Workpiece blank with orthographic projections Size of the blank Coordinate system el e e e e e 8 e 10 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space Overview of functions Function Soft key Move workpiece blank to the left graphically Move workpiece blank to the right graphically Move workpiece blank forward graphically Move workpiece blank backward graphically Move workpiece blank upward graphically Move workpiece blank downward graphically Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum TE UP NATE S IZ EHEBBBH shift the soft key row O Show the entire traversing range referenced to the workpiece blank I Show the machine datum in the working space io Show a position determined by the machine tool builder e g tool change position in the working space io hn Show the workpiece datum in the working space lje Disable OFF or enable ON work space monitoring during test run a 7 7 b OQ TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 7 10 MOD Functions 10 7 Position Display Types The positions indicated in figure 10 4 are otarting position A Target position of the tool Z Workpiece datum W e e e e Scale reference point M Fig 10 4 Characteristic positions on the workpie
95. 9 Moo Mo M42 M81 M43 M82 M44 M83 M45 M84 M46 M85 M47 M86 M48 M87 M49 M88 Function Effective at Start End of block TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 3 Preassigned Q Parameters Q100 to Q113 are assigned values by the TNC These values include e Values from the PLC e ool and spindle data e Data on operating status etc Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Tool radius Q108 The current value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis Tool axis Parameter value No tool axis defined Q109 1 Z axis 0109 2 Y axis Q109 1 X axis O109 0 Spindle status Q110 The value of Q110 depends on which M function was last programmed M function Parameter value No spindle status defined Q110 1 MO3 Spindle ON clockwise 0110 U M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise OITO 4 MO5 after MO3 OTIO 2 MO5 after M04 OTIO 3 Coolant on off Q111 M function Parameter value M08 Coolant on Olt m 4 MO9 Coolant off Q111 0 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 19 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 3 Preassigned Q Parameters Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling MP 7430 is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the part program Q113 The value of parameter
96. 9 and 1 43 The typewriter style keyboard provides letters symbols and function keys e g backspace that you need to create and change texts The soft keys enable you to move around in the text and to find delete copy and insert letters words sections of text text blocks or entire files To create a text file Enter a file name for example ABC and confirm ENT The following information is visible in the high lighted line at the top of the text window FILE Name of the current text file esc denn LINE Line in which the cursor is IN THE TEXT FILE YOU MAY presently located e COLUMN Column in which the cursor is mEDdR TEST BESUT presently located DOCUMENT WORKING PROCEDURES e INSERT Insert new text pushing the STORE FORMULAS AND TABLES existing text to the right eS eer RECORD MACHINE PARAMETERS e OVERWRITE Write over the existing text erasing It where it is replaced with the new text You can toggle between the INSERT and OVER WRITE modes with the soft key at the far left The MOVE Move PEE PASE arem wo em selected mode is shown enclosed in a frame pada MN 3 bs i Fig 4 17 TNC text editor screen To leave a text file Ea gt Select a different type of file for example programs in ISO format TYPE MGT m D Choose the desired program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 29 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files The text that you type always appears on the screen wh
97. 999 9999 and 99999 9999 You can enter the individual Q parameter functions either blockwise see pages 7 3 to 7 12 or together in a formula through the ASCII keyboard see pages 7 20 to 7 22 Fig 7 1 Q parameters as variables Certain Q parameters are always assigned the same data by the TNC For example Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius A list of these parameters can be found in Chapter 11 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Programming with Q Parameters Use the O key below the key to select the O parameter functions The following soft keys appear with which you can select function groups TRIGO JUMP DIVERSE FORMULA FND NOME TRY FUNC TION Function Soft key Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root Trigonometric functions TRIGO NOME TRY If Then conditions jumps JUMP Other functions DIVERSE FUNC TION Enter formula directly from keyboard FORMULA TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 759 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 74 The Q parameter function DO ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters Example Q10 25 This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example X Q10 X 25 You only need to write one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimen sions as Q parameters To pr
98. Ad hdd phi n db RAPID EB ard cb 11 4 TNG displays TNG COOP uuu enepttbtut prout iaa nd dote eau td bee ne ar A dientes 11 7 Macmnining and DIOS a m Uy secessu dunk vae Pe ER Gu v E a ta Ra rv 11 13 Electronic Dana WTIBBlsssieesssEa i i FE Ya a dbbGie hace aaa i aa ia bid dd 11 15 11 2 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions 11 16 Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect sssssssssee 11 16 Vacant miscellaneous functions sssssssssssse me enne 11 18 11 3 Preassigned Q Parameters eeeeeeeereernnee nennen 11 19 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories 11 21 CREDI NUR NUUT KE 11 24 115 TNC Error Messages issensesxs paene Rad xeg Kicks Raritan Ove Eh e ox ue 11 26 TNC error messages during programming ssssssse mee 11 26 TNC error messages during test run and program run ssee 11 27 11 6 Address Letters ISO eeeeeeeeeeeeereennnen nnns 11 31 alarme tel COTIMUONS doaire dit racine do xps vasa depud tuve sdaiucn ites ma Ed dd tud usi 11 34 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series 1 2 The TNCs are shop floor programmable contouring controls for boring machines milling machines and machining centers with up to 5 axes They also feature oriented spindle stop Two operating modes are always active simultaneously one
99. Advantages e A smoother more continuous surface e Reduced machining time Example application Surface consisting of a series of straight line segments Duration of effect Servo lag mode must be selected M90 is only effective in the blocks in which it is programmed Independently of M90 you can use machine parameter MP7460 to set a limit value up to which the tool moves at constant path speed effective with servo lag and feed precontrol See page 11 14 Fig 5 42 Standard contouring behavior at G40 without M90 Fig 5 43 Behavior at G40 with M90 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior without M97 The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE Fig 5 44 Standard contouring behavior without M97 when the control would not generate an error message Machining contour steps with M97 The TNC calculates the contour intersection see figure of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point M97 Is programmed in the same block as the outside corner point Duration of effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed Fig 5 45 Contourin
100. G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N170 1465 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 B N180 G98 L N99999 59201 G71 Depending on the control setup machine parameters machining starts either with the outline or the surface Fig 8 19 Outline is machined first A Left pocket Right pocket Fig 8 18 Points of intersection S and S of pockets A and B Fig 8 20 Surface is machined first TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined includ ing the mutually overlapped area e Aand B must be pockets e he first pocket in Cycle G37 must start outside the second pocket N110 G98 L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 A N130 4435 J 50 G03 X410 Y 50 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N160 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N170 1465 J 50 G03 X450 Y 50 N180 G98 L Fig 8 21 Overlapping pockets area of inclusion Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B e A must be a pocket and B an island e A must start outside of B N110 G98L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 A N130 1435 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 N140 G98 L N150 G98 L2 N160 G01 G42 X 90 Y 50 N170 1 65 J 50 G03 X490 Y 50 N180 G98 LO Fig 8 22 Overlapping pockets area of exclusion Area of intersection Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to be machined e Aand B must be pockets e A must start inside B N110 Go8L1 Qr N120 G01
101. G41 X 60 Y 50 N130 1435 J 50 G03 X460 Y 50 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N160 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N170 1 65 J 50 G03 X490 Y 50 N180 G98 LO Fig 8 23 Overlapping pockets area of intersection at The subprograms are used in the main program on page 8 22 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 O20 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Subprogram Overlapping islands An island always requires a pocket as an additional boundary here G98 L1 A pocket can also reduce more than one island surface The starting point of this pocket must be within the first island The starting points of the remaining intersecting island contours must be outside the pocket Woo2Z2 G7 1 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 N20 G31 X4100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 N40 T1 G17 2500 N50 397 P01 2 P023 PO3 1 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 100 P05 0 PO6 0 P07 500 N70 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N80 X450 Y 450 MO3 N90 Z 2 M99 N100 2Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N120 G01 G41 X 5 Y 5 N130 X 95 N140 Y 95 N150 X 5 N160 Y 5 N170 G98 L N180 G98 L2 N210 G98 L N220 G98L3 N250 GJg LU INJ9999 9559221371 Area of inclusion Elements A and B are to be left unmachined including the mutually overlapped surface e Aand B must be islands e The first island must start outside the second island N180 G98 L2 N190 G01 G42 X 10 Y 50 N200 1435 Y 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 N210 G98 LO N220
102. ING PLANE to INACTIVE Enter an angular value of O for each tilt axis into the menu see page 2 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 59 9 External Data Transfer The TNC features two interfaces for data transfer between it and other devices Application examples Downloading files into the TNC Transferring files from the TNC to external devices Printing files Remote operation of the TNC The two interfaces can be used simultaneously 9 1 Data Transfer with the TNC 426 at The functions described in this chapter are operative in FE1 mode see page 10 4 If you want to use these functions with a PC you will need the TNC EXE data transfer software from HEIDENHAIN To copy individual files into the TNC Press PGM MGT to call the file manager Arrange the screen layout with the WINDOW soft key to show file names in both halves of the screen see Chapter 1 under File management on the TNC 426 In the left screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory into which you wish to copy the file from the external device Move the highlight to the right screen half with the rightward arrow key n the right screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory containing the files that you want to copy into the TNC Move the highlight to the file you want to copy into the TNC Press the COPY soft key and confirm with ENT The TNC copies the highlighted file into the TNC Close the file
103. MANUAL OPERATION TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS Move the axes over the reference marks in the displayed sequence For each axis press the START key or Cross the reference points in any sequence Press the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed The TNC is now ready for operation in the MANUAL OPERATION mode at The reference points need only be traversed if the machine axes are to be moved If you intend only to write edit or test programs you can select the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING or TEST RUN modes of operation immedi ately after switching on the control voltage The reference points can then be traversed later by pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key in the MANUAL mode of operation Traversing reference points with a tilted working plane 207 In a tilted coordinate system the reference points are traversed by pressing the machine axis direction buttons To enable this function set TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the MANUAL OPERATION mode see page 2 26 The TNC then interpolates the tilted axes as soon as the corresponding axis direction buttons are pressed The NC START key is disabled pressing this key will display an error message The angular values entered in the menu must correspond to the actual angle of the tilt axis TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 t19 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays In the program run operating modes except on TNC 40
104. MMING AND EDITING X Y Y The effective length and radius and the center misalignment of the 3D touch probe are stored in the TNC for use when the touch probe is needed again You can display the values on the screen TOOL AXIS H RRDIUS RING GRUGE 25 with the soft keys CAL L and CAL R EFFECT PROBE RADIUS 3 9996 EFFECTIVE LENGTH 12 78368 STYLUS TIP CENTER OFSET X 0 0051 STYLUS TIP CENTER OFSET Y 0 0008 ACTL 25 3684 Y 250 3600 25 0000 B 331 0008 C 12 5000 T Q M 5 9 Fig 2 11 Menu for touch probe radius and center misalignment Compensating workpiece misalignment The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation You set the rotation angle to the desired angle with respect to the reference axis in the working plane see page 1 13 Fig 2 12 Basic rotation of a workpiece probing procedure for compensation right The broken line is the nominal position the angle H is being compensated PROBING Press the PROBING ROT soft key I ROT ROTATION ANGLE Enter the nominal value of the rotation angle Move the ball tip A to a starting position near the first touch point 7 2 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Select the probe direction Probe the workpiece Move the ball tip B to a starting position near the second touch point 2 Probe the workpiece A basi
105. NC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Setting datum points over holes MANUAL OPERATION AND EDITING A second soft key row provides soft keys for using holes to set datums The touch probe is used in the same way as in the circle center as datum function see page 2 17 First pre position it in the approximate center of a hole then press the machine START button to automatically probe four points in the hole Move the touch probe to the next hole and have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the 25 3684 Y 250 3600 Z 25 0000 B 331 0000 holes have been probed to set datums C 12 5009 T F PROBING PROBING ROT jo P Fig 2 18 Second soft key row for TOUCH PROBE Function Soft key Basic rotation from 2 holes PROBING The TNC measures the angle between the line connecting the centers ROT of two holes and a nominal angular position angle reference axis Datum from 4 holes PROBING The TNC calculates the intersection of the line connecting the first two probed holes with the line connecting the last two probed holes If a basic rotation was P already made from the first two holes these holes do not need to be probed again Circle center from 3 holes The TNC calculates a circle that intersects the centers of all three holes and finds the center PROB ING TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Ze 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring wit
106. OBE SET 2 TABLE Display of a basic rotation TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Tool information OPERRTION E 953 03 P 2 023 TOOL T 1 SCHRUPP1 Q56 Q6 P 2 0108 058 08 Q72 912 PO2 026 Q72 072 PO2 029 DL Q77 017 PO2 07 TAB 0 2500 Q Q PO2 027 POM 077 077 029 p CUR TIME 078 018 08 os 078 078 026 TOOL CALL 1 SC 078 078 029 MEL m we 076 016 06 076 076 026 Q76 PO1 076 029 G54 X 01 V 02 2 053 S 25 6340 12 5000 0 5000 DR DR2 0 1000 TIME1 TIME2 07 30 06 40 HRUPP 1 STATU STATUS STATUS STATUS COORD PGM POS TOOL TRRNSF Coordinate transformations PROGRRM RUN TEST RUN FULL SEQUENCE NG G28 K PROGRAMS N G73 G90 H 13 DATUM SHIFT N8 G 2 F1 01115 12 5000 N9 G38 12 5000 2 0000 N10 GOG G40 G90 2 925 M3 N20 DOO 052 PO1 0 ROTATION 346 4400 iD MIRROR IMAGE eX N30 D 1 053 PO1 03 PO2 923 SCAL ING N48 D 1 O56 PO1 Q6 PO2 0108 0 0000 1 011150 0 0000 1 011150 N58 DOO O58 PO1 08 0 0000 1 011150 NGG DO4 Q 2 PO1 012 PO2 026 N70 DO3 Q 2 PO1 072 PO2 029 N80 DO2 Q PO1 017 PO2 07 N90 DO4 Q PO1 077 PO2 027 N100 D 3 Q PO1 Q PO2 029 N11 D 2 Q 8 PO1 918 PO2 08 STRTUS STRTUS STRTUS STRTUS COORD PGM POS TOOL TRANSF T Tool name and number RT Name and number of a replacement tool
107. OO G40 G90 74200 M2 Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 27 7 Programming with Q Parameters 9 Programming Examples N220 G98 L1 Subprogram bolt hole circle N230 DOO Q10 P01 0 Set the counter for finished holes N240 D10 P01 Q6 PO2 0 PO3 10 If the hole angle increment has been entered jump to LBL 10 N250 D04 Q6 P01 360 P02 03 Calculate the hole angle increment distribute holes over 360 N260 G98L10 N270 D01 Q11 P01 Q5 P02 Q6 Calculate second hole position from the start angle and hole angle increment N280 G90 I Q1 J4 Q2 GOO G40 Set pole at bolt circle center N290 G10 R Q4 H Q5 M3 Move in the plane to first hole N300 GOO Z Q7 M99 Move in Z to setup clearance call cycle N310 D01 Q10 P01 Q10 P02 1 Count completed holes N320 D09 P01 010 P02 Q3 P03 99 Finished N330 G98 L2 N340 G10 G40 G90 R 04 H 011 M99 Drill second hole and further holes N350 D01 Q10 P01 Q10 P02 1 Count finished holes N360 D01 Q11 PO1 Q11 P02 06 Calculate angle for next hole N370 D12 P01 010 P02 Q3 P032 Not finished N380 G98 L99 N390 GOO G91 Z 200 Retract in Z End of subprogram N99999 BOLTCIRC G71 7 28 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Ellipse X coordinate calculation X a cos a Y coordinate calculation Y b sin a b Semimajor and semiminor axes of the ellipse el Angl
108. PAGE TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER SELECT J INDOLI storage device al If you select the data transfer function from a tool table or pocket table only the functions TRANSFER TRANSFER ra Er nd fre Em are available 9 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 2 Data Transfer with the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Selecting and transferring files The data transfer functions are provided in a soft key row Soft key row in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation TRANSFER SELECT M IMDOLI mes pa 3 TYPE Selecting files Use the arrow keys to select the desired file The PAGE soft keys are for scrolling up and down in the file directory The SELECT TYPE soft key has the same function as described earlier see Chapter 1 File management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Transferring files from the TNC to an external device The highlight is on a file that is stored in the TNC Function Soft key Transfer selected file TRANSFER TNC s EXT Transfer all files TRANSFER THO EXT Select files consecutively for individual TRANSFER transfer Press ENT to transfer f otherwise press NO ENT THC ERT Selecting the file type Use the SELECT TYPE soft key to select other types of files Select screen layout Use the WINDOW soft key to select or deselect a split screen The single screen mode can be selected both for TNC files and for externally stored
109. PTS e ee Fig 9 1 Menu for blockwise transfer at When aborting blockwise transfer you may have to reset the interface with the CLOSE RS 232 C soft key 9 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 Interface HEIDENHAIN devices External unit HEIDENHAIN V 24 HEIDENHAIN eg FE standard cable adapter block connecting cable 3m max 17 m py TT C Id Nr 274 545 01 Id Nr 239 758 01 Id Nr 239 760 Chassis Receive Data Transmit Data Clear To Send Request To Send Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground 1 1 1 1 2 2 2l 2 3 3 Sl 3 4 4 454 D D 511 139 6 6 6 6 7 7 p 7 8 8 8 8 20 DSR Data Set Ready Fig 9 2 Pin layout of the RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices at The connector pin layout on the adapter block differs from that on the TNC logic unit X21 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 9 7 9 External Data Transfer 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout on a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device and depends on the unit and the type of data transfer Fig 9 3 shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block F O D V 24 Adapter Block RS 232 C Adapter block WH BN 4 ge gn S gr br GND Chassis RXD TXD CIS RIS DTR GND Signal Chass
110. Program Run 3 2 Program Run Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns the tool to the workpiece contour in the following situations e Return to contour after the machine axes were moved during a program interruption e Return to the position that was calculated for mid program startup PES TORE Select a return to contour POSITION Move the axes In any sequence RES TORE 1 Z RESTORE C H Resume machining TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9x 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 3 Optional Block Skip In a test run or program run the TNC can skip over blocks that you have programmed with a slash PAGE PAGE BEGIN END O l ji TERT TERT OFF ON O O Run or test the program with without blocks preceded by a slash OFF ON OFF ON at This function does not work with G99 blocks 3 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs 26 Programs that occupy more memory than the TNC TEST RUN provides can be drip fed block by block from an FILE NAME HDNENEEEENENENI external storage device RS232 FE1 H FILE NAME SECTORS STATUS During program run the TNC transfers program T blocks from a floppy disk unit or PC through its data H 4 interface and erases them after execution This eH i frees up memory for new blocks Coordinate eH 1 transformations remain active even when the cyc
111. Q113 specifies whether the highest level NC program for nesting with 96 is programmed in millimeters or inches Dimensions of the main program Parameter value Metric system mm 113 0 Inch system OTTS 1 Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to O114 Coordinates after probing during program run Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3D touch probe The length and radius of the probe tip are not compensated in these coordinates Coordinate axis Parameter X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 IVth axis Q118 Vth axis Q119 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 110 touch probe conversational programming only Actual nominal deviation Parameter Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles Rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC Coordinates Parameter 307 1315 1325 A axis Q120 B axis 127 C axis 122 11 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Tables Overviews and Diagrams Technical information Description Components Data interfaces Simultaneous axis control for contour elements Look Ahead Background programming Graphics File types Program memory Tool definitions Programming support TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories
112. SL Cycles Group II Example Input parameters in Cycle G125 Milling depth Q1 12mm Allowance for side Q3 0 Top surface of workpiece Q5 0 Clearance height O7 10 Pecking depth O10 2mm SR 75 R757 Feed rate for pecking Q11 100 mm min Feed rate for milling Q12 200 mm min Milling type Q15 climb milling 41 Cycle in part program 20593771 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 10 N40 T1 G17 51500 N50 G37 P01 1 N60 G125 Q12 12 Q3240 O5 4 0 O7 4 10 Q10 2 2 011 100 0122200 015231 Cycle definition Contour Train N70 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M3 Retract in the infeed axis spindle ON Cycle call N90 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 N100 G98 L1 Contour subprogram N110 G01 G41 X 0 Y 15 N120 X45 Y 20 N130 G06 X 5 Y 75 N140 G01 Y 95 N150 G25 R7 5 N160 G01 X 50 N170 G25 R725 N180 X 100 Y 80 N190 G98 LO N99999 9688371 G71 9 38 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il CYLINDER SURFACE G127 Er th The machine tool and the TNC must have been prepared by the machine manufacturer for the use of Cycle G127 Process This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical sur face for 3D machining The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOM The subprogram contains coordin
113. T WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the PROGRAM RUN mode of operation the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes effective in the first block of the part program to be executed If you have entered cycle G80 WORKING PLANE in the part program the angular values defined in the cycle become effective immediately after cycle definition Angular values entered in the menu will be overwritten To reset MANUAL OPERATION set TILT WORKING PLANE to INACTIVE TILT WORKING PLANE PROGRAM RUN INACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION ACTIVE 12 5 90 ACTL X 65 6792 Y 21 5938 H 114 4964 B 12 5000 C 90 0000 T 2 M 5 8 Fig 2 21 Menu for manual tilting in the MANUAL OPERATION mode 2 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 1 Test Run In the TEST RUN mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for the following errors without moving the machine axes Geometrical incompatibilities Missing information Impossible jumps Violation of the machine s working space The following functions can be used in the TEST RUN operating mode Blockwise test run Interrupt test at any block Block skip Blockwise transfer of very long programs from external storage media Graphic simulation Measurement of machining time Additional status display To run a program test at e f the central tool file is active the tool table with which the program test is to be run must have status S see page 1 31
114. T1 xxxx 0 and EXT2 xxxx 1 1326 MP5200 x Start transmission STX Decimal value for ASCII character 0 to 127 MP5201 x End transmission ETX MP5202 x Data input 1st character H MP5203 x Data input 2nd character E MP5204 x Data output 1st character H MP5205 x Data output 2nd character A MP5206 x Start of heading SOH MP5207 x End of transmission block ETB MP5208 x Positive acknowledgement ACK MP5209 x Negative acknowledgement NAK MP5210 x End of transmission EOT TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 3 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters 3D touch probes and digitizing Select touch probe MP6200 Triggering touch probe 0 Measuring touch probe 7 Select signal transmission MP6010 Touch probe with cable transmission 0 Touch probe with infrared transmission 1 Probing feed rate for triggering touch probes MP6120 80 to 3 000 mm min Maximum traverse to first probe point MP6130 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Safety clearance to probing point during automatic measurement MP6140 0 to 99 999 9999 mm Rapid traverse for triggering touch probes MP6150 1 to 300 000 mm min Measure center misalignment of the stylus when calibrating a triggering touch probe MP6160 No 180 rotation of the 3D touch probe during calibration 0 M function for 180 rotation of the 3D touch probe during calibration 7 to 88 MP6220 Traverse in the touch probe axis at the end of line 0 to 99 999 9999 mm l
115. TIECT OT tool compensation allies susceusicncsiutetnre dne Last oe tete eitis eo pdt dur venta due uS 4 17 Tool radius COPRIDEDSQUO R sasenisagddi coit ets de RU ORE Inge agant gi Riad nada ordei Poema aoa One 4 17 PAS CHIDIEIC CONEIS aarnior tener tree pates HUN RM ag etre 4 19 4 4 Program Creation eseeeseeeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nn nnns 4 20 WI iiseiis 2e Ie dI RE NEM 4 20 Toccate SV part ONT ss QT TOT OTT 4 21 4 5 Entering Tool Related Data eese 4 23 Feed rate EMO REP em 4 23 velle cies eco o NRI E 4 24 4 6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and Program Stop 4 25 4 7 Actual Position Capture ceeeseeeeeeeeneeen nennen nnn nnn nns 4 26 4 8 Integrated Pocket Calculator eere 4 27 4 9 Marking Blocks for Optional Block Skip 4 28 SC LUMBIED CR RIO t TE TOt 4 29 mg egeo quio de SENTENCE TE 4 31 To erase and insert characters words and lines eeseseseeeeeenee 4 32 Fe UIC EXT DOCKS PN REN RTI T OT 4 33 4 11 Creating Pallet Files eeeeeeeeeeeenrnennnnnnn nnn 4 35 4 12 Adding Comments to the Program eene 4 37 Ading comments to programi DIOGNS 5s esee iaa atio tani nac Hn LA Put la AR dcc 4 37 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Programming Tool Mov
116. TNC 407 1219 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Example Drawing with several relative datums ISO 129 or DIN 406 Part 11 fig 171 Example Coordinates of point X 10 mm Ya 5mm Z 0mm The datum of the Cartesian coordinate system is located 10 mm from point on the X axis and 5 mm from it on the Y axis The 3D Touch Probe System from HEIDENHAIN is an especially convenient and efficient way to find and set datums Fig 1 14 Point defines the coordinate system 1 14 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Absolute workpiece positions Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example Absolute coordinates of position X 20mm Y 10mm Ls 5TH If you are drilling or milling a workpiece according to a workpiece drawing with absolute coordinates you are moving the tool to the value of the coordinates Fig 1 15 Position definition through Incremental workpiece positions absolute coordinates A position can also be referenced to the preceding nominal position In this case the relative datum is always the last programmed position Such coordinates are referred to as incremental coordinates increment increase They are also called chain dimensions since the positions are defined as a chain of dimensions Incremental coordinates are designated with the prefix l Example Incremental coordinate
117. TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters Entering Formulas Directly Mathematical function Soft key Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determine the angle from the ASIN ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determine the angle from ACOS the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS 040 Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determine the angle from ATAN the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers xy Example Q15 3 3 T 3 14159 E Natural logarithm LN of a number base 2 7183 Example Q15 LN O11 r Logarithm of a number base 10 LOG Example 033 LOG 022 Exponential function 2 7183 Example Q1 EXP Q12 EXP Negate multiply by 1 Example Q2 NEG Q1 NEG Drop places after decimal point form an integer INT Example Q3 INT 042 Absolute value Example O4 ABS O22 Drop places before the decimal point form a fraction FRAC Example Q5 FRAC Q23 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 27 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly Rules for formulas e Higher level operations are performed first multiplication and division before addition and subtraction 1z5x542xX10 5959 1st step bx 3 2 15 2nd step 2 x 10 20 3rd step 15 20 35 Q2 SQ 10 3 3 73 gt 1ststep 10 100 2nd step 3
118. TUS Overview Information in pockettables 4 14 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Calling tool data The following data can be programmed in the NC block with T e ool number Q parameter e Working plane with G17 G18 or G19 e Spindle speed S To call tool data TOOL NUMBER 5 Enter the number of the tool as defined in the tool table or in a G99 id block for example 5 Select the spindle axis Z Enter the spindle speed e g S 500 rom Resulting NC block T5 G17 S500 Tool pre selection with tool tables If you are using tool tables G51 pre selects the next tool Enter the tool number or a corresponding O parameter Tool change u The tool change function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on this function Automatic tool change If your machine has automatic tool changing capability the TNC controls the replacement of the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine The program run is not interrupted Manual tool change To change the tool manually stop the spindle and move the tool to the tool change position Sequence of action Move to the tool change position under program control if desired Interrupt program run see page 3 5 Change the tool e e e e Resume the program run see page 3 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 15 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Tool change position
119. Thread overrun Ac 0 e at start of thread ns e at end of thread n Number of cuts Calculating the input values e otal height h In Pn P 1 5 mm nzn n 4n 9 ha T3 5mm e ncremental polar coordinate angle H r i 30D n 9 see total height h 591 He S60 9S 3240 e Starting angle A with thread overrun n n 0 5 The starting angle of the helix is advanced by 180 n 1 corresponds to 360 With positive rotation this means A with n A 180 180 e Starting coordinate P n nj 1 5 8 5 mm 12 75 mm Z is negative because the thread is being cut in an upward direction towards Z 0 Hog IN Part program occorre C Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 Define the workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T11 L 0 R5 acen Define the tool NAO TL1 G17 S2500 iescesesetesteseethn thes Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool NGO X50 Y 430 Loosisbcenpexiskekem Vici Kader Pre position in the working plane to the center of the hole XC Le Transfer position as pole NGO 7 12 MOG isaniiccntnrtarinationbnsinndstinansnacs Move tool to starting depth N90 G11 G41 R 32 H 180 F100 Approach contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate N100 G13 G91 H 3240 Z 13 5 F200 Helical interpolation angle and movement in infeed axis are incremental N110 GOO G40 G90 X 50 Y 30
120. To erase a file gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file you wish to erase Move the highlight to the desired file Shiftthe soft key row Press the DELETE soft key Press the YES soft key to delete the file or abort the deleting function with the NO soft key Close the file manager with END You can also erase directories Simply move the highlight to a directory instead of a file and proceed as described above Delete all files and subdirectories stored in this directory before erasing the actual directory To rename a file gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file you wish to rename Move the highlight to the desired file Shiftthe soft key row Press the RENAME soft key and enter the new file name Press the ENT key or the EXECUTE soft key to rename the file The original file name is erased Close the file manager with END To protect a file gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file you wish to protect Move the highlight to the desired file Shiftthe soft key row Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the PROTECT soft key The file now has status P and cannot be accidentally changed or erased Close the file manager with END To cancel file protection gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file wh
121. US TOO LARGE Enter a tool radius that e lies within the given limits e permits the contour elements to be calculated and machined TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE Pre position the 3D touch probe to a position nearer the model WRONG AXIS PROGRAMMED Do not attempt to program locked axes Program a rectangular pocket or slot in the working plane Do not mirror rotary axes Enter a positive chamfer length WRONG RPM Program a spindle speed within the permissible range WRONG SIGN PROGRAMMED Enter the correct sign for the cycle parameter TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 Address Letters ISO G Functions Group G Function Non modal See function Page Positioning 00 Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates rapid traverse 5 10 01 Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates 5 10 02 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates clockwise 5 18 03 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates counterclockwise 5 18 05 Circular interpolation Cartesian no direction of rotation given 5 18 06 Circular interpolation Cartesian tangential contour transition 5 24 07 Paraxial positioning block e 10 straight line interpolation polar coordinates rapid traverse 5 28 11 straight line interpolation polar coordinates 5 28 12 Circular interpolation polar coordinates clockwise 5 30 13 Circular interpolation polar coordinates counterclockwise 5 30 15 Circular interpolation polar
122. X Start end position Y End position X Milling depth Circle center X Circle center Y Circle starting point X Circle starting point Y Tool length L Tool radius R Milling feed rate F Block N130 to N260 correspondingly Block N10 to N140 from program 520I TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions select the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key to call the following functions Overview The mathematical functions assign the result of one of the following operations to a O parameter Soft key DO ASSIGN Da Example DOO Q5 P01 60 MET Assigns a numerical value D1 ADDITION Bi Example D01 O1 P01 Q2 P02 bx ds Calculates and assigns the sum of two values D2 SUBTRACTION D2 Example D02 Q1 PO1 10 PO2 5 e ds Calculates and assigns the difference of two values D3 MULTIPLICATION 03 Example D03 Q2 P01 3 P02 43 wr Calculates and assigns the product of two values D4 DIVISION Example D04 O4 P01 8 P02 02 Ho MN Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted division by 0 D5 SQUARE ROOT D5 Example D05 O20 P0O1 4 nee Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted square root of a negative number In the above table values can be any of the following e two numbers e two O parameters e anumber and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can
123. Your machine manual provides more information on the available spindle speeds Select S for spindle speed Enter the desired spindle speed for example 1000 rpm Press the machine START button to confirm the entered spindle speed The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a miscellaneous function M To change the spindle speed S Turn the knob for spindle speed override You can vary the spindle speed from 0 to 150 of the last entered value Qj The knob for spindle speed override is effective only on machines with a stepless spindle drive TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Zeb 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 2 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M To change the feed rate F In the MANUAL OPERATION mode the feed rate is set by a machine parameter Turn the knob for feed rate override You can vary the feed rate from 0 to 150 of the set value To enter a miscellaneous function M u The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous functions are available on your TNC and what effects they have Select M for miscellaneous function MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M Enter the miscellaneous function for example M6 Press the START button to activate the miscellaneous function See Chapter 11 for a list of the miscellaneous functions 2 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch P
124. a arc tan q arc tan a b arc tan sin a cos a Fig 7 3 Sides and angles on a right triangle Example a 10mm D 10mm a arctan a b 2 arc tan 1 45 Furthermore a b 2c a 2 a c VFR Select the trigonometric functions to call the following options DE D7 Ds 013 END SINGH COSH A LEM Y A ANG Y Overview Soft key D6 SINE ng Example D06 Q20 P01 Q5 ami Calculate the sine of an angle in degrees and assign it to a parameter D7 COSINE Bo Example DO7 Q21 P01 O5 AUN Calculate the cosine of an angle in degrees and assign it to a parameter D8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES BB Example D08 Q10 PO1 5 P02 4 H LEM Y Take the square root of the sum of two squared numbers and assign it to a parameter D13 ANGLE Example D13 Q20 P01 10 PO2 Q1 Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 angle 360 and assign it to a parameter D013 A ANG Y 7 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 4 f Then Decisions with Q Parameters The TNC can make logical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another O parameter or with a numerical value Jumps The jump target is specified by a label number in the decision block If the programmed condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the specified label If it is not fulfilled it continues with the next block To jump to another program
125. abel setting function LABEL NUMBER hesulting NC block G98 LO Call the subprogram A subprogram is called by its label number 5 ES o D Call the subprogram behind label 5 Resulting NC block L5 0 The command L0 0 is not permitted label O is only used to mark the end of a subprogram TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 3 6 6 1 6 4 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms Example for exercise Group of four holes at three different locations The holes are drilled with cycle G83 PECKING Enter the setup clearance feed rate etc in the cycle once You can then call the cycle with miscellaneous function M99 see page 8 3 Coordinates of the first hole in each group Group D X 15mm Y 10mm Group X 4b mm Y 60mm Group X 75mm Y 10mm Hole spacing 20 mm 20 mm Total hole depth 10mm Hole diameter O 5mm Part program 709641 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 N40 T1 G17 3500 N50 G83 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 0 N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 N70 X415 Y 10 N80 Z 2 MO3 N100 X 45 Y 60 N110 L1 0 N120 X 75 Y 10 N130 L1 0 N140 Z 100 MO2 N150 G98 L1 N160 G79 N170 G91 X 20 M99 N180 Y 20 M99 N190 X 20 G90 M99 N200 G98 LO N99999 965641 G71 Start program Define blank form Define the tool Call the tool Cycle definition PECKING see page 8 5 Retra
126. able depth levels can be selected with the soft keys e TEST RUN mode 16 or 32 e PROGRAM RUN modes 16 or 32 866228258 Wim ee ee Plan view is the fastest of the three graphic z 1 iini display modes Fig 1 21 TNC graphics plan view B B d4 s w Es ADD eazaa a0 16 32 D D D Cx Show 16 or 32 shades of depth 15 32 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 21 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Projection in 3 planes L 1 LA Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes A symbol to the lower left indicates whether the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO 6433 selected with MP 7310 Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see page 1 25 Fig 1 22 TNC graphics projection in three planes Shifting planes The sectional planes can be shifted as desired The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting 19 0 0 A i RESET STORE ADD m Ab BLK esa FORIS o O D Fig 1 23 Shifting sectional planes S TORE ADO RESE T ped aa aggsiaga sb a BLK oO Oo e rom OtO Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right or left Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards or downwards 1 22 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Cursor position
127. ad pitch 1 75 mm negative because of upward working direction Approach 1st hole in the X Y plane Call subprogram Approach 2nd hole in the X Y plane Call subprogram End of main program Orient spindle to 0 makes it possible to cut repeatedly Tool offset in the plane to prevent collision during tool infeed dependent on core diameter Pre position in the tool axis at rapid traverse to setup clearance above workpiece surface Pre position in the tool axis at rapid traverse to bottom starting position Reset the tool in the plane to hole center Cycle call End of subprogram TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles SLOT MILLING G74 Process Roughing process e The tool penetrates the workpiece from the Starting position offset by the oversize then mills in the longitudinal direction of the slot e The oversize is calculated as slot width tool diameter 2 e After downfeed at the end of the slot milling is performed in the opposite direction This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached Finishing process e The control advances the tool at the bottom of Fig 8 5 SLOT MILLING cycle the slot on a tangential arc to the outside contour The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 e At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted in rapid traverse to the setup clearance If the number of infeeds was odd the tool returns to the star
128. al path shown in figure 8 11 at the programmed feed rate The stepover factor is determined by the value k see G75 G76 POCKET MILLING Calculations e The process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached e At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the starting position Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center Fig 8 11 Cutter path for roughing out Direction of rotation for roughing out Clockwise G77 Counterclockwise G78 Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE e MILLING DEPTH B pocket DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative sign means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e CIRCLE RADIUS B Radius of the circular pocket e FEED RATE u Fig 8 12 Distances and infeeds for Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Starting point Before a cycle is called the tool must be moved to the following starting point with tool radius compensation G40 e n the tool axis to setup clearance above the workpiece surface e n the machining plane to the pocket center Fig 8 13 Direction of the cutter path TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 19 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Milling a circular pocket Pocket center coordinates 60 mm Y 50 mm Setup
129. al stylus 0 TT 120 with cubic stylus 464 Automatically enter the results in TOOL T 0 Do not correct TOOL T 128 Maximum permissible error of measurement for measuring rotating tools with the TT 120 Required for calculating the probing feed rate in connection with MP6570 MP6510 0 001 to 0 999 mm recommended input value 0 005 mm Feed rate for probing a tool with the TT 120 during standstill of the tool MP6520 10 to 3000 mm min Radius measurement with the TT 120 Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus The value entered for MP6530 is added to the value defined in the tool table for TT L OFFS MP6530 0 0001 to 9 999 9999 mm Rapid traverse for the TT 120 touch probe in the probe cycle MP6550 10 to 10000 mm min Measuring rotating tools Permissible rotational speed at the circumference of the milling tool MP6570 40 000 to 120 0000 m min Stylus center REF coordinates of the TT 120 touch probe MP6580 0 X axis 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6580 1 Y axis 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6580 2 Z axis 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm 11 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Programming station MP7210 TNC with machine 0 TNC as programming station with active PLC 1 TNC as programming station with inactive PLC 2 Acknowledgment of POWER INTERRUPTED message after switch on MP7212 Acknowledge with
130. amming with Q Parameters 7 5 Checking and Changing Q Parameters During a program run or program test O parameters can be checked and changed if necessary Preparation e f youare in a program run interrupt it for example by pressing the machine STOP key and the INTERNAL STOP soft key e f you are doing a test run interrupt it To call the Q parameter Select the parameter for example O10 Q10 100 The TNC displays the current value Leave the O parameter unchanged TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 P15 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Select the diverse functions to call the following options for the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 114 D15 13 END ERROR PRINT PLC Select the diverse functions to call the following options for the TNC 426 D14 Dib DiG SYvS DRTUH S S DRTUM ERROR PRINT F PRINT Displaying error messages 14 ERROR With the function D14 ERROR you can call messages that were preprogrammed by the machine tool builder If the TNC encounters a block with D14 during a program run or test run it will interrupt the run and display an error message The program must then be restarted Input Example D14 PO1 254 The TNC then displays the text stored under error number 254 Error number to be entered Prepared dialog text 0 to 299 D14 ERROR CODE 0 299 300 to 399 PLC ERROR O 99 400 to 499 CYCLE PARAMETER 0 99 300 to 999 TNC 426
131. an untilted coordinate system and vice versa by pressing the 3D ON OFF soft key The functions of the axis direction buttons the elec tronic handwheel and the positioning logic for return to contour are then evaluated by the TNC When retracting the tool make sure the correct coordinate system is active and the angular values of the tilt axes are entered in the 3D ROT menu see page 2 26 Example retracting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupt machining MBNLURBL Enable the machine axis direction buttons OPERATION Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons u On some machines you may have to press the machine START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to the operating manual of your machine tool for further information Resuming program run after an interruption att e f a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated e f a program run is interrupted during execution of a subprogram or a program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores e The data of the last tool called e Active coordinate transformations e The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined The stored data are used for returning the too
132. and pocket floor The algebraic sign determines the working direction negative sign means negative working direction e PATH OVERLAP FACTOR Q2 Q2 tool radius stepover factor k e ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q3 Finishing allowance in the working plane e ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q4 Finishing allowance in the tool axis e WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATE O5 Fig 8 36 Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the work piece datum e SETUP CLEARANCE Q6 Distance between the tool tip and the workpiece surface e CLEARANCE HEIGHT Q7 Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle e NSIDE CORNER RADIUS Q8 Inside corner rounding radius e DIRECTION OF ROTATION Q9 Direction of rotation for pockets Clockwise Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island Counterclockwise Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and island Activation Em Fig 8 37 Direction of rotation Q9 and G120 becomes effective immediately upon definition stepover factor k The machining parameters can be checked during a program interruption and overwritten if required If the SL cycles are used in Q parameter programs the cycle parameters Q1 to Q17 cannot be used as program parameters yor ng Fig 8 38 Distance and infeed parameters 8 32 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group ll PILOT DRILLING G
133. ane Input data Parallel axes are programmed in the first coordinate block positioning block I J K block of the first subprogram called in Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Coordinate axes entered subsequently will be ignored TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 17 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group CONTOUR GEOMETRY G37 Application All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY a p Input data Enter the LABEL numbers of the subprograms Up to 12 label numbers can be defined Activation G37 becomes effective as soon as it is defined Fig 8 14 Example of an SL contour A and B are pockets C and Dare islands Example G99 T3 L 0 R 3 5 TORT BOUE arerin rE E tudin d dinde Working plane perpendicular to Z axis G37 PO011P022P03 3 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 EG Em First contour label for Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY 301 842 X40 YIO LL iiesesp iiti c be ek rte Letras ini Eran Machining in the X Y plane X 20 Y 10 50 J 50 8 18 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group ROUGH OUT G57 The ROUGH OUT cycle specifies cutting path and partitioning Sequence e The control positions the tool in the tool axis over the first infeed point taking the finishing allowance into account e he tool then penetrates the workpiece at the programmed feed rate for pecking Milling the contour e he tool mills the first subcontour at the specified
134. are entered as the difference from the zero tool Note down the value and enter it later Enter the display value by using the actual position capture function see page 4 26 4 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Entering tool data into the program The following data can be entered once for each tool in the part program e ool number e Tool length compensation value L e ool radius R To enter tool data into the program block cgo um a EL Give the tool a number for example 5 e g ENT TOOL LENGTH L Enter the compensation value for the tool length e g L 10 mm TOOL RADIUS R M5 Enter the tool radius e g R 5 mm Resulting NC block G99 T5 L 10 R 5 uit You can enter the tool length L directly in the tool definition by using the actual position capture function see page 4 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 7 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Entering tool data in tables A tool table is a file containing the data for all tools The maximum number of tools per table 0 to 254 is set in machine parameter MP7260 On machines with automatic tool changers the tool data must be stored in tool tables You can edit these tool tables using special time saving editing functions Types of tool tables Tool table TOOL T is e used for machining e edited in a program run mode of operation All other tool tables are e used for test runs and archiving e edited i
135. art program Ve BOLVOIRC G71 aerate saoi tuu texe t Soon iaia Load data for bolt hole circle 1 N10 DOO Q1 PO1 30 esee Circle center X coordinate N290 DOQ COZ POT 4 70 75 easiest assem uet Qe xpo nbus re uos Uo S Circle center Y coordinate N30 DOO Q3 PO1 11 sseseeseeenmmRRRHI Number of holes N40 DOO OA POT 4257 uio stesustie ue rnu tcu asientos nidos Bolt circle radius NBO DOO O5 POT F90 5 acridians Starting angle NOO DOO OG POT FOT cc ccsveabivchcsviet anklsmcecimdbionsevesenaten Hole angle increment 0 distribute holes over 360 N70 DOO O7 POT 2 1uissesosiesas actu tekRo Exit rnit n Setup clearance NEO DODOS POT 3 18 7 iessessetes tuse nnt adt mE umen Total hole depth N90 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 N100 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N110 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 N120 T1 G17 S2500 N130 G83 P01 Q7 P02 08 P03 5 FOF OPUS 2 90 irosbssasiabiXntbiisbies dde pito Sinn Cycle definition Pecking LX MMOL JME Call bolt hole circle 1 Load data for bolt hole circle 2 only re enter changed data N1150 D00 O1 POT 490 T noniine tabu ras besito eas New circle center X coordinate NHO60 DOD 2 FOT 25 M priae iraniana New circle center Y coordinate NIZODOOO FOT D Tenia e ii New number of holes NISO DOO OA POT 357 soirceas aaea aiae New bolt circle radius N190 DOO OG POT 430 iocos tenter ttp Rabb rriena New hole angle increment not full circle 5 holes 30 apart I am a a Call bolt hole circle 2 N210 G
136. at rapid traverse If the stylus is not deflected within the distance defined in MP 6130 the TNC displays an error message Fig 2 8 Feed rates during probing To select the touch probe functions w P MANUAL OPERATION or ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Select the touch probe functions CAL L CAL FR PROB ING yess PROBING PROB ING L Rer Ges e Ge ane TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 9 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Calibrating the 3D touch probe The touch probe must be calibrated in the following cases for commissioning after stylus breakage when the stylus is changed when the probing feed rate is changed in the case of irregularities such as those resulting from warming of the machine During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tip To calibrate the touch probe clamp a ring gauge of known height and known inside radius to the machine table To calibrate the effective length m Fig 2 9 Calibrating the touch probe length Set the datum in the tool axis such that for the machine tool table Z O Select the calibration function for the touch probe length If necessary enter the tool axis Move the highlight to DATUM Enter the height of the ring gauge here 5 mm If necessary change the displayed traverse direction The touch probe contacts the upper surface of the ring gauge 2 10 TNC 426 TNC 42
137. ates in a rotary axis and in its parallel axis The rotary axis C for example has Z as its parallel axis The path functions G01 G02 GO3 with R G25 are available for programming The dimensions in the rotary axis can be entered as desired either in degrees or in mm inch You can select the desired dimension type in the cycle definition Fig 8 42 Contour on a cylindrical surface Fig 8 43 The unrolled surface of the cylinder L Diameter of cylinder 3 14 G127 CYLINDER SURFACE should not be used for closed contours With closed contours the starting point and end point of the contour must not be located in a contour corner TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il 8 40 Input MILLING DEPTH Q1 Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q3 Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled cylindrical surface This allowance is effective in the direction of the radius compensation SETUP CLEARANCE Q6 Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface PECKING DEPTH O10 Dimension by which the tool advances in each infeed FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Feed rate for traversing in the tool axis FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Feed rate for traversing in the working plane RADIUS Q16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined DIMENSION TYPE ANG LIN Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the s
138. automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program e Coordinate transformation cycles e Dwell time cycle e SL cycles which determine the contour and the global parameters All other cycles must be called separately Further information on cycle calls is provided in the descriptions of the individual cycles If the cycle is to be executed after the block in which it was called program the cycle call e with G79 e with miscellaneous function M99 If the cycle is to be executed after every positioning block it must be called with miscellaneous function M89 depending on the machine parameters M89 is cancelled with eM99 e 579 e A new cycle definition at Prerequisites The following data must be programmed before a cycle call Blank form for graphic display Tool call Positioning block for starting position X Y with tool radius compensation G40 Positioning block for starting position Z setup clearance Direction of spindle rotation miscellaneous functions M3 MA4 Cycle definition e e e e e e Dimensions in the tool axis The dimensions for the tool axis are always referenced to the position of the tool at the time of the cycle call and are interpreted by the control as incremental dimensions It is not necessary to program G91 qi The control assumes that the tool is located at clearance height over the workpiece at the beginning of the cycle except for SL cycles of group II TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC
139. be entered with positive or negative signs TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 7 7 Programming with Q Parameters 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions Programming example for basic arithmetical operations Assign the value 10 to parameter Q5 and assign the product of Q5 and the value 7 to Q12 select PARAMETER select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select function DO ASSIGN PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT 5 Enter parameter number for example Q5 FIRST VALUE PARAMETER Assign numerical value to parameter Q5 7 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions select PARAMETER select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select function D3 MULTIPLICATION PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT UD Enter parameter number for example O12 FIRST VALUE PARAMETER SECOND VALUE PARAMETER Resulting NC blocks DOO Q5 P0O1 10 DOS Q12 P01 Q5 D02 7 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 9 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 3 Trigonometric Functions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of the sides of right triangles For a right triangle the trigonometric functions of the angle a are defined by the equations sina a c cosa Dc tana a b sina cosa where e cis the side opposite the right angle e ais the side opposite angle a e bthe third side The angle can be found from the tangent
140. ber and accounts for them when executing positioning blocks The way the tool is used is influenced by several miscellaneous functions see page 11 16 Setting the tool data Tool numbers Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 254 When the tool data are entered into the program tool number O is auto matically defined as having length L O and radius R O In tool tables also tool O should be defined with L O and R O Tool radius R The radius of the tool is entered directly Tool length L The compensation value for the tool length is measured e as the difference in length between the tool and a zero tool or e with a tool pre setter A tool pre setter eliminates the need to define a tool in terms of the difference between its length and that of another tool TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 5 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Oversizes for lengths and radii delta values In tool tables you can enter so called delta values for tool length and radius e Positive delta values tool oversize e Negative delta values tool undersize Application e Undersize in the tool table for wear Delta values can be numerical values or O The maximum permissible oversize or undersize is 99 999 mm Determining tool length with a zero tool For the sign of the tool length L L L Ihe tool is longer than the zero tool L lt The tool is shorter than the zero tool Fig 4 3 Tool lengths
141. block T ivi I Do EXT H I Function Soft key Call a plain language program H Call an ISO program Pr I Call an externally stored program Resulting NC block NAME 6 8 e You can also call a program with cycle G39 see page 8 53 e When calling an ISO program the program name must not contain G50 G70 or G71 The following additional notes apply to the TNC 426 e f the program you want to call is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you only have to enter the program name e f the program you want to call is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from then you must enter the full path e g VZW3BNNOUGHNPGM 1 1 e f you want to call a plain language program enter the file type H behind the program name TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Subprograms and program section repeats can be nested in the following ways Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprograms repeated e e e e Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subpro grams Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 8 Maximum nesting depth for calling main programs 4 Subprogram within a subprogram Program layout
142. c rotation is kept in non volatile storage and is effective for all subsequent program runs and graphic simulation Displaying basic rotation MANUAL OPERATION PROGRAMING K Vt we The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE whenever PROBING ROT is selected It is also shown in the additional status display see page 1 27 under ROTATION In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the axes ROTATION ANGLE HEA according to a basic rotation ACTL 25 3684 Y 250 3600 25 0000 B 331 0000 12 5000 T M 5 9 Fig 2 13 Displaying the angle of an active basic rotation To cancel a basic rotation Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING ROT Ke ROT ROTATION ANGLE o Set the rotation angle to 0 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2715 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe The following functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece e Datum setting in any axis with PROBING POS e Defining a corner as datum with PROBING P e Setting the datum at a circle center with PROBING CC To set the datum in an axis Fig 2 14 Probing for the datum in the Z axis PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS C POS Probe the workpiece Enter the nominal coordinate of the datum 2 14 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Se
143. ce and scale The TNC position display can show the following coordinates e Nominal position the value presently commanded by the TING P etsairen aana NOML e Actual position the position at which the TOON IS Oe Seri esci p MN ACTL e Servo lag the difference between nominalna actual DOSITIDEIS 9 sessies niteat LAG e Reference position the actual position as referenced 10 the scale deTerence DOMME 4 vasos pusectonus tiia REF e Distance remaining to the programmed position the difference between actual and target positions 5 Dist With the MOD function POSITION DISPLAY 1 see figure 10 3 you can select the position display in the status display With the MOD function POSITION DISPLAY 2 see figure 10 3 you can select the position display in the additional status display 10 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 8 Unit of Measurement This MOD function determines whether coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches e To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the CHANGE MM INCH function to MM The value is displayed with 3 digits after the decimal point e o select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inch set the CHANGE MM INCH function to INCH The value is displayed to 4 decimal places 10 9 Programming Language for SIMDI The PROGRAM INPUT mod function lets you decide whether to program the MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conver
144. ce datum see page 1 13 Scale reference point The position feedback scales are provided with one or more reference marks Reference marks define the position of the scale reference point If the scale has only one reference mark its position is the scale reference point If the scale has several distance coded reference marks then the scale reference point is the position of the leftmost reference mark at the beginning of the measuring range Machine datum miscellaneous function M91 The machine datum is required for the following AL LUN tasks e Defining the limits of traverse software limit fm 2L NN i Ii Ii i f e Moving to machine referenced positions such as tool change positions e Setting the workpiece datum Amey X Z Y The distance for each axis from the scale reference J point to the machine datum is defined by the machine manufacturer in a machine parameter If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 Fig 5 48 Scale reference point 4 and machine datum on scales with one or more reference marks Coordinates that are referenced to the machine datum are indicated in the display with REF Additional machine datum miscellaneous function M92 In addition to the machine datum the machine manufacturer can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine manufactu
145. ce monitoring The TNC only monitors the axes in the tilted system that are moved If any of the software limit switches is traversed the TNC will display an error message Combining coordinate transformation cycles When combining coordinate transformation cycles always make sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum You can program a datum shift before activating Cycle G80 In this case the machine based coordinate system is shifted If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle G80 the tilted coordinate system is shifted When resetting it is important to use the reverse procedure the cycle that was last defined should be reset first Example 1 Activate datum shift 2 Activate tilting function 3 Activate rotation Machining 1 Reset rotation 2 Reset tilting function 3 Reset datum shift Automatic workpiece measurement in the tilted system Cycle G55 see page 7 23 enables you to have the TNC measure a workpiece in the tilted system automatically Ihe measured data are stored in O parameters for further processing for example for printout 8 58 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles Procedure for working with Cycle G80 WORKING PLANE 1 Create program e Define the tool not required when TOOL T is active Call the tool Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during tilt
146. ch you wish to begin data transfer for m e g example 150 cC PROGRAM RUN Execute the transferred blocks starting with the block number that you entered TEST RUN Test the transferred blocks starting with the block number that you entered START You can use machine parameter MP7228 see page 11 12 to define the memory range to be used during blockwise transfer This prevents the transferred program from filling the program memory and disabling the background programming feature As an alternative you can call the external program with 96 EXT see page 6 8 and perform a mid program startup Example To perform a mid program start up from block 12834 of external program GEH35K1 proceed as follows Write the following short program START UP G71 N10 96 EXT GEHS35K1 N99999 START UP G71 Select the START UP program in the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode of operation Select the RESTORE POS AT N function and enter the desired block number here 12834 for START UP AT and the desired program here GEH35K1 for PROGRAM Start block scan with the NC START key 3 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 Programming In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation see pages 1 30 and 1 40 you can e create new files e edit existing files This chapter describes the basic functions and inputs that do not yet cause machine axis movement The entry of geometry for workpiece ma
147. chining is described in the next chapter 4 1 Creating Part Programs Layout of a program Program block A part program consists of individual program blocks The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence The block number increment is defined N10 GOO G40 G90 X 100 Y 20 M3 in MP 7220 see page 11 7 Program blocks consist of units of information called words Path function Block Words number Fig 4 1 Program blocks consist of words of specific information Function Key Continue dialog SE Ignore dialog question mz Te End block Delete block delete word E GB AnD TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs Editing functions Editing means entering adding to or changing commands in programs The TNC enables you to Enter data with the keyboard Select desired blocks and words Insert and erase blocks and words Correct wrong values and commands Easily clear TNC messages from the screen Types of inputs Numbers coordinate axes and radius compensation are entered directly by keyboard You can set the algebraic sign either before during or after a numerical entry Selecting blocks and words e o calla block with a certain block number The highlight jumps to block number 10 e o move one block forwards or backwards or Press the vertical cursor keys e o select individual words in a block e To find the same word in other blocks r Dis
148. clearance Milling depth Pecking depth Feed rate for pecking mm min Circle radius mm Milling feed rate mm min Direction of the cutter path CIRCULAR POCKET cycle in a part program 2905814l G71 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 Define tool N40 T1 G17 S2000 Call tool N50 G77 P01 2 P02 12 P03 6 P04 80 P05 35 Define circular pocket milling cycle N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 60 Y 50 M03 Approach the starting position center of pocket spindle ON N80 Z 2 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call N90 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 9588141 G71 8 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group I SL cycles are highly efficient cycles that allow machining of any contour These cycles have the following characteristics e A contour can be composed of several overlapping subcontours Islands or pockets can form a subcontour e he subcontours are defined in subprograms e The control automatically superimposes the subcontours and calculates the points of intersection formed by overlapping The term SL is derived from the characteristic Subcontour List of Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Since this is purely a geometry cycle no cutting data or feed values are defined The machining data are specified in the following cycles
149. ct and insert tool Move to group 1 Pre position in the infeed axis Call subprogram subprogram executed with block N90 Move to group 2 Call subprogram Move to group 3 Call subprogram Retract in the infeed axis end of main program M02 the subprogram is entered behind MO2 Beginning of subprogram Perform pecking cycle for first hole Move to second hole incremental and drill Move to third hole incremental and drill Move to fourth hole incremental and drill change to absolute coordinates G90 End of subprogram End of program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 2 Program Section Repeats Like subprograms program section repeats are identified with labels Operating sequence The program is executed up to the end of the labelled program section 1 and i e up to the block with Ln m Then the program section between the called label and the label call is repeated the number of times entered after under m 3 The program is then resumed after the last repetition 5 Programming notes N99999 e A program section can be repeated up to 65 534 times in succession e he total number of times the program section is Fig 6 2 Flow diagram for a program section repeat executed is always one more than the pro B return jump grammed number of repeats Programming and executing a program section repeat Mark the beginning Select
150. cycles Define a cycle before calling it Enter a pecking depth other than O TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 27 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 TNC Error Messages EXCESSIVE SUBPROGRAMMING Conclude subprograms with G98 LO Program Ln O for subprogram calls Program Ln m for program section repeats Subprograms cannot call themselves Subprograms cannot be nested in more than eight levels Main programs cannot be nested as subprograms in more than four levels FEED RATE IS MISSING e Enter feed rate for G01 block GROSS POSITIONING ERROR The TNC monitors positions and movements If the actual position deviates excessively from the nominal position this blinking error message is displayed You must press the END key for a few seconds to correct the error KEY NON FUNCTIONAL This message always appears when you press a key that is not needed for the current dialog LABEL NUMBER NOT FOUND Call only label numbers that have been set NO EDITING OF RUNNING PROGRAM A program cannot be edited while it is being transmitted or executed PATH OFFSET WRONGLY ENDED Do not cancel tool radius compensation in a block with a circular path PATH OFFSET WRONGLY STARTED e Use the same radius compensation before and after a G24 and G25 block e o not begin tool radius compensation in a block with a circular path 11 28 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 TNC Err
151. d Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE 9 e MILLING DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction negative sign means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane Fig 8 31 Infeeds and distances for CONTOUR MILLING Fig 8 32 Finishing allowance TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group The following scheme illustrates the application of the cycles PILOT DRILLING ROUGH OUT and CONTOUR MILLING in part programming 1 List of contour subprograms G37 No call 2 Drilling Define and call the drilling tool G56 Pre positioning Cycle call Fig 8 33 PILOT DRILLING cycle 3 Rough out Define and call rough milling tool 557 Pre positioning Cycle call Fig 8 34 ROUGH OUT cycle 4 Finishing Define and call finish milling tool G58 G59 Pre positioning Cycle call Fig 8 35 CONTOUR MILLING cycle 5 Contour subprograms MO2 Subprograms for the subcontours TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 29 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Example Overlapping pockets with islands Inside machining with pilot drilling roughing out and finishing PGM S8291 is based on S824 The main program section is expanded by the cycle definitions and calls for pilot drilling and finishing The contour subprograms 1 to 4 ar
152. d contour The TNC moves the tool center directly to the end point Enter miscellaneous function for example M3 spindle on clockwise rotation When all coordinates have been entered conclude the block with END Resulting NC block N25 GOO G42 G91 X50 G90 Y 10 Z 20 M3 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 11 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a rectangle Coordinates of the corner points X bmm X bmm PEE X 95mm Milling depth Z 10 mm Part program 2709512 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 N40 T1 G17 S2500 N130 GOO G40 X 10 Y 10 MO5 N140 Z100 M02 IN99999 7655121 77 Begin the program Program name 5121 dimensions in millimeters Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation MIN and MAX point Define tool in the program Call tool in the infeed axis Z G17 Spindle speed S 2500 rpm Retract in the infeed axis rapid traverse miscellaneous function for tool change Pre position near the first contour point Pre position in the infeed axis spindle ON Move to 1 with radius compensation Move to corner point 2 Move to corner point 3 Move to corner point 4 Move to corner point 1 end of machining Depart the contour cancel radius compensation spindle STOP Retract in the infeed axis spindle OFF coolant OFF program stop return to bloc
153. d program section repeats are marked by labels A label is identified by a number between 0 and 254 Each label except label 0 can be set only once in a program Labels are set with G98 LABEL 0 marks the end of a subprogram 6 1 Subprograms Operating sequence The main program is executed up to the block in which a subprogram is called with Ln O The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end G98 LO The main program is then resumed from the block after the subprogram call 8 Z 100 M2 G98L1 4 G98 LO N99999 Operating limitations Fig 6 1 Flow diagram for subprogramming S jump return jump e A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms e Subprograms can be called in any sequence and as often as desired e A subprogram cannot call itself e Subprograms should be written at the end of the main program behind the block with MO2 or M30 e f subprograms are located before the block with MO02 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called 6 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 1 Subprograms Programming and calling subprograms h Mark the beginning Select the label setting function LABEL NUMBER B8 The subprogram begins with for example label number 5 Resulting NC block G98 L5 Mark the end A subprogram always ends with label number O Select the l
154. d rate Information on the radius and length of the tool spindle speed and tool axis must also be included in the program Programming ISO programming is partially dialog guided The programmer is free to enter the individual commands words in each block in any sequence except with G90 G91 The commands are automatically sorted by the TNC when the block is concluded 1 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Reference system In order to define positions a reference system Is necessary For example positions on the earth s surface can be defined absolutely by their geographic coordinates of longitude and latitude The word coordinate comes from the Latin word for that which is arranged The twork of h tal and vertical d the glob titut OSS 60 dede dcn si ani cdm tect one ete dono Lf FTT ONS ON position that is referenced to a known location FT ETT Tey LTT TT WE jJ NUNE See TZ 90 0 90 Fig 1 8 The geographic coordinate system is an absolute reference system Cartesian coordinate system On a TNC controlled milling machine workpieces are normally machined according to a workpiece based Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system named after the French mathematician and philosopher Renatus Cartesius who lived from 1596 to 1650 The Cartesian coordinate system is based on three coordinate axes X Y and Z which are parallel to the mach
155. deflected to the side The TNC decreases the feed rate according to a preset characteristic curve The minimum input value is 10 of the programmed digitizing feed rate MP6362 Feed rate decrease not active 0 Feed rate decrease active 1 Target window for digitizing contour lines with measuring touch probes When you are digitizing contour lines the individual contour lines do not end exactly in their starting points With machine parameter MP 6390 you can define a square target window within which the end point must lie after the touch probe has orbited the model Enter half the side length of the target window for the input value MP6390 0 1 to 4 0000 mm TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 5 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters 3D touch probes and digitizing Radius measurement with the TT 120 touch probe Probing direction MP6505 Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis 0 Positive probing direction in the 90 axis 1 Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis 2 Negative probing direction in the 90 axis 3 Probing feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 stylus shape corrections in TOOL T MP6507 Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 with constant tolerance 40 Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 with variable tolerance 7 Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 120 2 TT 120 with cylindric
156. drilling process is repeated Input data SETUP CLEARANCE ice identical to Cycle G83 DWELL TIME PECKING FEED RATE e FINISHING ALLOWANCE Allowed material for the drilling operation see figure 8 30 The sum of the tool radius and the finishing allowance should be the same for pilot drilling as for roughing out TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Fig 8 29 Fig 8 30 NEA EN LZ Example of cutter infeed points for PECKING Finishing allowance 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 The CONTOUR MILLING cycles are used to finish mill the contour pocket The cycles can also be used generally for milling contours Sequence e The tool is positioned at setup clearance over the first starting point e Moving at the programmed feed rate the tool then penetrates to the first pecking depth e Upon reaching the first pecking depth the tool mills the first contour at the programmed feed rate in the specified direction of rotation e At the infeed point the control advances the tool to the next pecking depth This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached The remaining subcontours are milled in the same manner Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 Direction of rotation during contour milling Clockwise G58 e For M3 up cut milling for pocket and island Counterclockwise G59 e For M3 climb milling for pocket and islan
157. e Starting angle End angle Increment Sphere radius Setup clearance Plane angle starting angle End angle Increment Center of sphere X coordinate Y coordinate Milling feed rate Oversize The parameters additionally defined in the program have the following meanings Q15 Setup clearance above the sphere Q21 Solid angle during machining Q24 Distance from center of sphere to tool center Q26 Plane angle during machining Q108 TNC parameter with tool radius Part program 20944 21 G7 Start of program N10 DOO Q1 POI N20 DOO Q2 P01 N30 DOO Q3 P01 N40 DOO Q4 P01 N50 DOO O5 P01 N60 DOO O6 P01 N70 DOO Q7 P01 N80 DOO O8 P01 N90 DOO O9 P01 N100 DOO Q10 P01 50 N110 DOO Q11 PO1 500 N120 DOO Q12 P01 0 Assign the sphere data to the parameters N130 G30 G17 X40 Y 0 Z 50 Define workpiece blank N140 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 Define tool S160 T1 G17 52500 Call tool N170 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool N180 L10 0 Call subprogram N190 Z 100 MO2 Retract in the infeed axis return to beginning of program Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 791 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples N200 G98 L10 N210 D01 O15 P01 Q5 P02 04 N270 DOO Q21 POT OT succ trn tota Eme tkRn bei Determine starting and calculation values N230 D01 024 P01 04 P02 0108 N240 DOO Q26 P01 06 N250 G54 X 09 Y 010 Z
158. e With the MOD function DATUM SET you can activate work space monitoring for the test run see page 10 6 Brome MM Select the program in the file directory 3 Go to the beginning of the program m Function Soft key Test the entire program START Test each program block individually START S INGLE LJ Show the blank form and test the entire RESET program START Interrupt the test run S TOP 3 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 1 Test Run To run a program test up to a certain block With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run up to the block with block number N Select the TEST RUN mode and go to the program beginning Select a partial test run Pa N70 DOO O18 PO1 90 N80 DOG Q9 PO 0 STOP AT N STOP AT N PROGRAM 3815 I PROGRAM z w s REPETITIONS E OHEA Enter the block number N at which you want the test to stop Enter the name of the program that contains block number N If N is located in a program section repeat enter the number of repeats that you want to run Test the program up to the entered block The display functions for test run In the TEST RUN operating mode the TNC offers functions for displaying a program in pages PAGE PAGE BEGIN END il Il TEXT TEXT OFF ON Function Soft key Go back in the program by one screen Go forward in the program by one screen PAGE Go to the beginning of the
159. e beginning of the file Move the cursor to the T of TOOLS SELECT Activate the selecting function cC i Move the cursor to the end of the block repeatedly REMOVE Erase the text and store temporarily cC n Move the cursor to the beginning of the file repeatedly INSERT Insert the stored text block Note The stored block is inserted above the cursor and may be off screen e Select the text again and copy it into another file Mark the text block as described above APPEND Select the function for copying to another file TO FILE DESTINATION FILE Write the name of the file into which you wish to copy the block for example W2Z Copy into a another file Text block remains marked 4 34 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 11 Creating Pallet Files EUR Pallet files are used with machining centers and contain the following information e Pallet number PAL e Part program name PGM NAME e Datum table DATUM To edit pallet files PROGRAMMING AND EDITING aS Call the file management cC shift the soft key row and show P type pallet files FILE NAME P Select a pallet file or enter a new file name to create a new file To link programs and datum tables PROGRAM NAME Enter the name of a part program that belongs to this pallet file DATUM TABLE Enter the name of the datum table for the program If necessary NEXT LINE Pallet
160. e between the leading axis and the connecting line from P to the center of the ellipse X Yy Center of the ellipse The points of the ellipse are calculated and connected by many short lines The more points that are calculated and the shorter the lines connecting them the smoother the curve becomes The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting angle and end angle The input parameters are listed below in blocks N10 to N120 Calculations are programmed with the FORMULA function Part program Ellipse G71 Load data N10 DOO Q1 P01 X coordinate for center of ellipse N20 DOO Q2 P01 Y coordinate for center of ellipse N30 DOO Q3 P01 Semiaxis in X N40 DOO Q4 P01 Semiaxis in Y N50 DOO Q5 P01 Starting angle N60 DOO Q6 P01 N70 DOO Q7 P01 Number of calculation steps N80 DOO Q8 P01 Rotational position N90 DOO O9 P01 N100 DOO Q10 P01 100 Plunging feed rate N110 DOO Q11 P01 350 Milling feed rate N120 DOO Q12 P01 2 Setup clearance in Z N130 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N140 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 N160 T1 G17 N170 GOO G40 G90 Z 200 N180 L10 0 Execute subprogram ellipse N190 GOO Z 200 M2 Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 29 7 Programming with Q Parameters 9 Programming Examples N200 G98 L10 N210 G54 X Q1 Y Q2 Shift datum to center of ellipse N220 G73 G90 H OS8 Activate rotation if Q8 is loaded
161. e cable Switch on the FE Insert a diskette into the upper drive Format the diskette if necessary Set the interface see page 10 4 Transfer the data at e The memory capacity of a floppy disk is given In sectors e The baud rate can be set at the FE 401 Non HEIDENHAIN devices The TNC and non HEIDENHAIN devices must be adapted to each other To adapt a non HEIDENHAIN device to the TNC e PC Adapt the software e Printer set the DIP switches To adapt the TNC to a non HEIDENHAIN device Set the user parameters e 5020 0 to 5210 0 for EXT1 e 5020 1 to 5210 1 for EXT2 The two settings can be adjusted for example to a PC e g EXT1 or toa printer EXT2 9 T0 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional displays and MRNURL PROGRRMMING RND EDITING epo mye OPERRTION input possibilities The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Functions and displays available in the PROGRAM MING AND EDITING mode of operation Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code number Set data interface NC SOFTWARE NUMBER 259930 07S Machine specific user parameters PLC SOFTWARE NUMBER 252499 01 HELP files if provided CODE NUMBER p uu Q 85422 HELP END RS 422 SETUP PARAMETER Fig 10 1 MOD functions in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode uci Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code
162. e identical to the ones in PGM S824lI see page 8 26 and are to be added after block N300 H229 71 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 Tool definition drill bit N40 G99 T2 L 0 R 3 Tool definition roughing mill N50 G99 T3 L 0 R 2 5 Tool definition finishing mill N60 L10 0 Subprogram call for tool change N70 G38 MO6 Program STOP N80 T1 G17 52500 Tool call drill bit N90 G37 POT 1 P02 2 PO3 3 P044 Cycle definition Contour Geometry N100 G56 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 500 P05 2 Cycle definition Pilot Drilling N110 Z 2 M03 N120 G79 Cycle call Pilot Drilling N130L10 0 N140 G38 M06 Tool change N150 I2 G17 51750 Tool call roughing mill N160 G57 P01 2 PO2 10 PO3 5 P04 100 P05 2 P06 0 P07 500 Cycle definition Rough Out N170 Z 2 M03 Cycle call Rough Out N190 L10 0 N200 G38 M06 Tool change N210 T3 G17 S2500 Tool call finishing mill N220 G58 P01 2 PO2 10 P03 10 P04 100 Cycle definition Contour Milling N230 Z 2 M03 Cycle call Contour Milling N250 Z 100 M02 N260 G98 L10 Subprogram for tool change N270 TO G17 N280 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N290 X 20 Y 20 N300 G98 LO From block N310 Add subprograms on page 8 26 N99999 9658291 G71 8 30 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il The SL cycles of group Il allow contour oriented machining of compl
163. e scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks When a reference mark is crossed over it generates a signal which identifies that position as the machine axis reference point With the aid of this reference mark the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine axis positions If the position encoders feature distance coded reference marks each axis need only move a maximum of 20 mm 0 8 in for linear encoders and 20 for angle encoders Fig 1 18 On this machine the tool moves in the Y and Z axes and the table moves in the X axis Fig 1 19 Linear position encoder here for the X axis Fig 1 20 Linear scales with distance coded reference marks upper illustration and one reference mark lower illustration TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 3 Switch On a Switch on and traversing the reference points can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on these functions Switch on the TNC and machine tool The TNC automatically initiates the following dialog MEMORY TEST The TNC memory is automatically checked POWER INTERRUPTED TNC message indicating that the power was interrupted Clear the message TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM The PLC program of the TNC is translated automatically RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks the EMERGENCY OFF circuit
164. e you want to copy Shiftthe soft key row Select the file tagging function with the TAG soft key Press the TAG FILE soft key The TNC tags the highlighted file with an arrow at its left and shows it in a different color gt Move the highlight to the next file you want to copy Tag the file with TAG FILE Tag all files you want to copy in this way Press the COPY TAG soft key and confirm with ENT Die TNC copies the tagged files into the active directory in the right screen half The original files are retained Close the file manager with END at e f the target directory contains files with the same file names as the files to be copied the TNC will ask you whether you want to overwrite these files Press the YES soft key to overwrite all files or press the CONFIRM soft key to confirm each file separately before overwriting it If you want to overwrite a protected file you can suspend file protection during the copying process e When you are converting files with the TAG function you can also use wildcards By copying into A for example you can convert all tagged files into ASCII text files e f you press the COPY TAG soft key with the screen layout showing drives directories to the left and file names to the right the TNC asks you for a DESTINATION DIRECTORY Enter the complete path name including the drive TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1997 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426
165. ed e Use the tool data length radius axis either from the calibrated data or from the last TOOL CALL block Selection is made with machine parameter MP 7411 see page 11 13 To program the use of a touch probe Bag PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT Be Enter the number of the O parameter to which the coordinate should be assigned for example Ob PROBING AXIS PROBING DIRECTION Enter the probing axis for the coordinate for example X Select and confirm the probing direction Enter all coordinates for the pre positioning point values for example X 5 mm Y 0 Z 5 mm Conclude input Resulting NC block G55 P01 Q5 P02 X X45 Y 0 Z 5 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 29 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run Example for exercise Measuring the height of an island on a workpiece Coordinates for pre positioning the 3D touch probe O11 O12 O13 Touch point 1 O22 X Y Z Touch point 2 X Q21 Y Z Q23 Part program 270571270971 Start of program N10 DOO Q11 PO1 20 N20 DOO Q12 P01 50 N30 DOO Q13 P01 10 Assign coordinates to the parameters for pre positioning N40 DOO Q21 P01 50 the touch probe N50 DOO O22 P01 10 N60 DOO Q23 P01 0 N70 TO G17 N80 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Insert probe N90 G55 P01 10 P02 Z X Q11 Y O12 Z Q13 Probe in negative direction store Z coordinate in Q10 first point N100 X Q21
166. ed the highlight onto the file e f the TNC recognizes erroneously transferred program blocks it will mark them with ERROR Correct these blocks in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode e f you want to transfer files between two TNCs start transmission from the receiving TNC e You can start a program in a program run mode of operation even if its transfer in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode has not been completed yet The program must not contain TOOL DEF blocks or label numbers e f you are transferring tables into the TNC you can overwrite individual lines or columns in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites he target table must exist The file to be transferred must only contain the columns or lines you want to replace TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 Jed 9 External Data Transfer 9 2 Data Transfer with the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 To select external data transfer Menu for external data transfer appears on the screen The screen is divided into two halves Interface mode Active interface FE1 FE2 ME EXT1 EXT2 RS 232 or RS 422 indicated file type TNC RS232 FE13 79153 H 1100 MDI 1 FRESRDOR H 482 1 TRB1 10 TOOL ERFG EN 74 115 Files in PRL1 56 123 Files if any in external the TNC PAL2 756 123456 DD25LP 462 200 SK50 462 22742602 1 218 300 11V 696 3500 2 190 3501 1 5 FILE S 150016 BYTES VACANT 46 FILE S 680 SECTORS VACANTT PAGE
167. ed to the MP7475 Workpiece datum 0 Machine datum 1 11 14 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Electronic handwheel Handwheel type MP7640 Machine without handwheel 0 HR 330 with additional keys the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evaluated by the NC 7 HR 130 without additional keys 2 HR 330 with additional keys the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evaluated by the PLC 3 HR 332 with twelve additional keys 4 Multi axis handwheel with additional keys 5 HR 410 with auxiliary functions 6 Entry of interpolation factor MP7641 Interpolation factor is entered on the keyboard 0 Interpolation factor is set by the PLC 1 Machine parameters that can be set for the handwheel by the machine tool builder MP 7645 0 0 to 255 MP 7645 1 0 to 255 MP 7645 2 0 to 255 MP 7645 3 0 to 255 MP 7645 4 0 to 255 MP 7645 5 0 to 255 MP 7645 6 0 to 255 MP 7645 7 0 to 255 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 15 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 2 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect M Effect Effective at block Page start end Moo Stop program run spindle STOP coolant OFF e 3 5 MO2 Stop program run spindle STOP coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 e 3 5 MO3 Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockw
168. ements 5 1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements 5 2 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure cccccsccssseecsseeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeaes 5 4 Starting pomtand end PONE csi cossncocascesstenaasagaarodatecsateite aS daas robes rodeenasetactierabtezahaseanes 5 4 Tangential GODOT OAC AIG departe ucoechcia atii Rp rl R S n race acia Pr Ga Va mr 5 6 SEE NS HU TII EIER 5 7 General WO FOU PME RR MT 5 7 Machine axis movement under program control cece ccc ecccecce ccc a eeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeneees 5 7 Overview of path functions sssssssssssssses Im I Ime Hm rn n nnne nnne nens 5 9 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates 5 10 GOO Straight line with rapid traverse cece cc cecccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeneeeeneeeeneeeanes 5 10 G01 Straight line with feed rate F sss emnes 5 10 oda COnBENUSI e a ONIUN PIER MEE IRSE MI IE E 5 13 CIroles angd elFeuldl AICS uuuasatieut cuta tiuia tete ida Fi ra nn ta aou Ro AA EAEAN d rand Rad ac 5 15 Circle center Led qmmmc 5 16 3502 6G0 3 305 Circular path around pole J K 2er rtm titt kt aiian 5 18 G02 G03 G05 Circular path with defined radius ssssseenHRHRRe 5 21 GO6 Circular path with tangential connection essssssee 5 24 GEI Moi IMS Qo e NORTE 5 26 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates eere 5 28 Polar coordinate
169. ements conversational programming only D gt U ge D Approach depart contour o m U straight line Circle center pole for polar coordinates Circle with center Circle with radius Tangential circle BS NS CE Cg S Chamfer E o Corner rounding o Tool functions conversational programming only 1e jeje DEF CALL R B3 Cycles subprograms and program section repeats conversational programming only exe Ke o i DEF CALL LBL LBL SET CALL Enter program stop in a program Enter or call tool length and radius Activate tool radius compensation not on TNC 426 Define and call cycles Enter and call labels for subprogramming and program section repeats Enter touch probe functions in a program PROBE Coordinate axes and numbers editing X 7 Select coordinate axes or enter them into a program Z E 3 O D T Decimal point Arithmetic sign Polar coordinates Incremental dimensions Q parameters for part families or mathematicalfunctions Capture actual position BO 8B Skip dialog questions delete words mz 20 Confirm entry and resume dialog End block Clear numerical entry or TNC message BER m m w m r Abort dialog delete program sections O TNC Guideline From the workpiece drawing to program controlled machining Step Task TNC operating Section in mode manual Preparation 1 Select tools 2 Set workpiece da
170. ens 9 2 To copy multiple files into the TNC ssssssssssss Hmmm nnne 9 3 CODVING Hes QUE OT TAG TNG 9 3 9 2 Data Transfer with the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 4907 9 4 Selecting and transferring files sssssssssssse memes 9 5 BIOCKWIC SIONS ic MERE REIR D T E RE 9 6 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces 9 7 H2 925010 24 TOL TCS sirida a anena a Fanta EEAO anc EAn stem aided SA ES EN ai 9 7 meu MEME iuo NT 9 9 9 4 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer 9 10 HEIDEPIFIAIN IOVIS e csestetateroMte oM s bsentetE i eaaa 9 10 Non HEIDENHAIN devices xucsaiaexapesasedddenoadin kara depre rn dera OR dea Ra 9 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 i 10 MOD Functions 10 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD Functions 10 3 10 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers 10 3 10 3 Code Numbers eeeeeeeeeeeeenn eene nnne nnne nnne nnn nnn nnn nnns 10 3 10 4 Setting the External Data Interfaces 10 4 Setting the RS 232 interface ssssssssssssssssee e Ie He heme nene nne nnne rsen erreren 10 4 Seno THE H9 122 Intel TIO cons accauottauitentcntettey mea e Inga tivo duiur ti en eias ate verto Ru qued v 10 4 Selecting the OPERATING MODE a is cscausnioasassutentenetsnadenenmennctwindiakandeduaatoonaenaaadehixans 10 4
171. ensation Fig 5 4 First contour point for machining Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis When the starting point S is approached the spindle axis is moved to l l working depth l If there is danger of collision approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately Z7 Example GOO G40 X Y Positioning X Y i Z 10 Positioning Z Fig 5 5 Separate movement of the spindle when there is danger of collision 5 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure End point Similar requirements hold for the end point e Can be approached without collision e Near the last contour point e Avoids tool damage The ideal location for the end point is again in the extension of the tool path outside of the shaded area It is approached without radius compensation Fig 5 6 Endpoint E for machining Departure from an end point in the spindle axis The spindle axis is moved separately Example G00 G40 X Y Approach end point Z 50 Retract tool Fig 5 7 Retract spindle axis separately Common starting and end point Outside of the shaded areas in the illustrations it is possible to define a single point as both the starting and end point GB The ideal location for the starting and end point is exactly between the extensions of the tool paths for machining the first and last contour elements A common starting and end
172. equired data for each contour element 5 to 8 10 Depart contour Entries Feed rate rapid traverse GOO Cancel radius compensation G40 Coordinates of end position P M Vans Miscellaneous function spindle stop MOb For smooth departure if necessary program G27 after this block 5 2 5 4 11 Retract tool Entries Feed rate rapid traverse GOO Coordinate above workpiece surface Lari Miscellaneous function end of program M02 5 2 5 4 12 End of program Miscellaneous Functions M Functions Miscellaneous Functions with predetermined effect M Effect Effective at block start end Moo Program run spindle STOP coolant OFF M02 Program run spindle STOP coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 e Mos Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise e MO5 Spindle STOP MOG Tool change stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP MOS Coolant ON e Mog Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON e M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise coolant ON M30 Same function as M02 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter e M90 Only in lag mode Constant contouring speed at corners e M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum M92 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine builder such as tool change position e IM93 Reserved
173. er 30 Press the S key for sine on the ASCII keyboard Press the on the ASCII keyboard Enter the number 50 Press the key on the ASCII keyboard the TNC displays the result 25 at the top of the calculator You can use the actual position capture key to transfer the result to the highlight position in the current block only available in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 27 4 Programming 4 9 Mlarking Blocks for Optional Block Skip You can mark program blocks so that the TNC will skip them during a program or test run whenever the block skip option is active see page 3 10 To mark a block Select the desired block Mark the beginning of the block with a slash att e Blocks containing a tool definition G99 cannot be skipped e To skip cycles program the slash in the first block of the cycle To erase the slash Select the block that contains the slash to be erased Erase the slash at the beginning of the block 4 28 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files You can use the TNC s text editor to write and edit texts Typical applications e Recording test results e Documenting working procedures e Keeping formulas and creating cutting data diagrams The text editor can edit only type A files text files If you want to edit other types of files with the text editor you must first convert them see pages 1 3
174. er R2 R e Oversizes delta values for tool radii and tool lengths DR DR2 DL e ooth length of the tool LCUTS TNC 426 only e Maximum plunge angle of the tool ANGLE TNC 426 only PAGE PAGE Tool name NAME ela F Maximum and current tool life TIME1 TIME2 CUR TIME Fig 4 4 Left part of the tool table CUTTER1 DRILLER CUTTER1R BILLS oo vn oOo UO F amp F WY NY KY O Number of a replacement tool RT Tool lock TL Tool comment DOC Information on this tool for the PLC programmable logical control for interfacing the control to the machine PLC TL RT TIME TIME2 CUR TIME DOC i5 5 0 5800 5000 1256 FIRST TOOL The following tool data only apply for automatic tool Ji haga eae i288 measurement conversational programming only o 0 OLD TOOL 0 ROUGH e Number of cutting edges for tool measurement CUT Q e Length tolerance for tool wear LTOL a 4 s e Radius tolerance for tool wear RTOL i 650 e Cutting direction for dynamic tool measurement a DIRECT d e Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Zaro LE RS M nd ajel l l TABLE TABLE LINE Preset value tool radius R e Tool offset between upper edge of stylus and Fig 4 5 Right part of the tool table lower edge of tool TT L OFFS Preset value O e Length tolerance for tool break LBREAK e Radius tolerance for tool break RBREAK A general user parameter MP7266 defines which data can be entered i
175. ere the cursor is located You can move the cursor with the cursor keys and the following soft keys Function Soft key Move one word to the right HOVE WORD gt F Move one word to the left MOVE WORD lt lt Go to the next screen page PAGE Go to the previous screen page PAGE Go to beginning of Tile BEGIN TERT Go to end of file In each screen line you can enter up to 77 characters from the alphabetic and numeric keypads The alphabetic keyboard offers the following function keys for editing text A Function ey Begin a new line Erase character to left of cursor backspace EB Insert a blank space DM PAC P Exercise Write the following text in the file ABC A You will need it for the exercises in the next few pages JOBS ex IMPORTANT MACHINE THE CAMS ASK THE BOSS PROGRAM 13 5 Hs 80 OK IMPORTANT cian MACHINE THE CAMS ASK THE BOSS TOOLS PROGRAM 1375 H 80 OK TOOL 1 DO NOT USE BY LUNCH TOOL 2 CHECK REPLACEMENT TOOL TOOL 3 a CEND TOOLS TOOL 1 DO NOT USE TOOL 2 CHECK INSERT Move Move PAGE PAGE agen zw REPLACEMENT TOOL TOOL 3 peer Fig 4 18 Text editor screen with exercise text 4 30 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 10 Text Files Finding text sections You can search for a desired character or word with FIND at the far right of the first soft key row The following functions then appear FIND CURRENT EXECUTE E ND
176. errupted block N for mid program startup uit e Mid program startup must not begin in a subprogram e All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be selected in a program run mode of operation If the part program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION If you are working with nested programs you can use MP7680 to define whether the block scan is to begin at block O of the main program or at block O of the last interrupted program If the working plane is tilted you can use the 3D ON OFF soft key to define whether the TNC is to return to the contour in a tilted or in an untilted coordinate system O Go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan cC RESTORE Select mid program startup POS AT M Mud 11 blr S15U0U START UP AT N START UP RT N PROGRAM 2 REPETITIONS 1 E RCTL 132 5 8 REPETITIONS Aie es Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end Enter the name of the program containing the block N If block N is located in a program section repetition enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan Start the block scan RESTORE Return to the contour see next page POSTTIOW 3 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and
177. es of the circle center N90 G01 G41 X50 Y 0 F100 oaser Move to first contour point with radius compensation at machining feed rate POO GORIOT Loan casting pianin tud aai Soft tangential approach N110 G02 X 50 Y O sss Mill arc around circle center J negative rotation coordinates of end point X 50 mm and Y 0 BO TAO LM Soft tangential departure N130 GOO G40 X450 Y 40 ooo ceccceeceeeeeeee ees Depart contour cancel radius compensation N140 Z 100 M02 uissstaxbiydikaiinikepktdadi gained iia Retract in the infeed axis INS9999 95955201 G71 Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 9 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Part program with Q parameters 96974 G71 N10 DOO Q1 P01 100 N20 DOO Q2 P01 30 N30 DOO Q3 P01 20 N40 DOO O4 P01 70 N50 DOO Q5 P01 N60 DOO Q6 P01 50 N70 DOO Q7 P01 50 N80 DOO Q8 P01 50 N90 DOO Q9 P01 N100 DOO Q10 P01 0 N110 DOO Q11 P01 15 N120 DOO Q20 P01 100 N130 G30 G17 X 1 Y 1 2 20 N140 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 T6 L Q10 R Q11 N160 T6 G17 S1000 N170 GOO G40 G90 Z 01 MO6 N180 X Q2 Y Q3 N190 Z 05 M03 N200 Q6 J Q7 N210 G01 G41 X 08 Y 09 FQ20 N220 G26 R10 N230 G02 X 08 Y Q9 N240 G27 R10 N250 GOO G40 X 04 Y Q3 N260 Z 01 M02 N99999 S74l G71 7 6 Start of program Clearance height Start position
178. ex contours and achieve a particularly high degree of surface finish These cycles differ from those of group in the following ways Before the cycle starts the TNC automatically positions the tool to the setup clearance Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in Cycles G123 and G124 The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece in a tangen tial arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling MP 7420 is replaced by DIRECTION OF ROTATION O9 The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle G120 There are four cycles for contour oriented machining PILOT DRILLING G121 ROUGH OUT 6G122 FLOOR FINISHING 6123 SIDE FINISHING G124 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 31 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il CONTOUR DATA G120 Application Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle G120 These data are valid for Cycles G121 to G124 Input data e MILLING DEPTH Q1 Distance between workpiece surface
179. f 3D surfaces e Cylindrical end mills can be used inclined tool milling e Faster machining e Better surface definition Fig 5 14 Example of simultaneous movement of more than three axes machining a 3D surface with an end mill Input example G01 G40 X 20 Y 10 Z 2 A 15 C 6 F100 M3 Fig 5 15 Inclined tool machining three linear and two rotary axes The additional coordinates are programmed as usual in a G01 block at The TNC graphics cannot simulate four or five axis movements 5958 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 3 Path Functions Overview of path functions Function Input in Cartesian Input in polar coordinates coordinates Straight line at rapid traverse GOO G10 Straight line at programmed feed rate G01 G11 Chamfer with length R G24 A chamfer is inserted between two straight lines Circle center also the pole for polar coordinates I J K l J K generates no movement Circular arc clockwise CVV 302 G12 Circular arc counterclockwise CCW G03 519 Programming of the circular path e Circle center J K and end point or e Circle radius and end point Circular movement without direction of rotation G05 G15 The circular path is programmed with the radius and end point The direction of rotation results from the last programmed circular movement G02 G12 or G03 G13 Circular movement with tangential connection G06 G16 An arc with tangential tran
180. f the axes are positioned automatically in Cycle G80 e he TNC can only position controlled axes e You can only use preset tools with the full tool length defined in the G99 block or in the tool table e he position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting e The TNC tilts the working plane at the last programmed feed rate The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the complexity of the swivel head or tilting table If the axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle G80 position them before defining the cycle for example with a GOO block NC blocks GOO G40 G90 Z 100 X 25 Y 10 G01 A 15 F1000 Pre position in axis of rotation G80 A4 15 Define angle for compensat ing the slant GOO G40 Z 80 Activate compensation for Z axis X 7 5 Y 10 Activate compensation for X Y axes TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 57 8 Cycles 8 6 Other cycles Position display in a tilted system On activation of Cycle G80 the displayed positions ACTL and NOML and the datum indicated in the additional status display are referenced to the tilted coordinate system The positions displayed immediately after cycle definition may not be the same as the coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle G80 As soon as you move an axis in a tilted system the compensation for this specific axis is activated Move all axes to activate compensation for all axes Work spa
181. feed rate taking the finishing allowance into account e As soon as the tool returns to the infeed point it is advanced to the next pecking depth This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached e Further subcontours are milled in the same manner Roughing out pockets e After milling the contour the pocket is roughed out The stepover is defined by the tool radius Islands are jumped over e f required pockets can be cleared with several downfeeds e At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the setup clearance Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 if the pocket is not separately pilot drilled or if the tool must repeatedly jump over contours Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE e MILLING DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH Q e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FINISHING ALLOWANCE D Allowance in the machining plane positive value BRE TIE m O n IsStances e ROUGH OUT ANGLE 9 E ROUGH OUTcyde Feed direction for roughing out The rough out angle is relative to the angle reference axis and can be set so that the resulting cuts are as long as possible with few cutting movements e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane The machine parameters determine whether e the contour is milled fir
182. files are managed and output as determined in the PLC The machine manual provides further information on this Create more pallet files TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 35 4 4 11 Programming Creating Pallet Files Functions for editing pallet tables The following functions help you to create and change pallet tables Function Key Soft key Move the highlight vertically Move the highlight horizontally Go to the beginning of the table BEGIN TABLE Go to the end of the table ENO TABLE Go to the next page of the table PAGE Go to the previous page of the table PAGE Insert the last line in the table INSERT LINE Delete the last line in the table DELETE LINE Go to the beginning of the next line NEXT LIME To leave the pallet file Ed b Select a different type of file for example programs in ISO format TYPE MGT SELECT Choose the desired program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 12 Adding Comments to the Program Comments can be added to the part program in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Applications e Explanations of program steps e Adding general notes Adding comments to program blocks You can add comments to a program block immedi PROGRAMMING AND EDITING ately after entering the data by pressing the semicolon key on the alohabetic keyboard G 1 2 25 F250 G83 P 1 1 P 2 25 PO03 5 P04 l P 5 150 Input X 180
183. first contour point with radius compensation at machining feed rate N100 G26 R10 Soft tangential approach N110 G02 X450 Y 0 Mill arc around circle center I J direction of rotation negative clockwise coordinates of end point X 50 mm Y 0 N120 G27 R10 Soft tangential departure N130 GOO G40 X450 Y 40 Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N140 Z 100 MO2 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 9685201 G71 5 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G02 G03 G05 Circular path with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with radius R Defining the direction of rotation e Clockwise G02 e Counterclockwise G03 e No definition G05 the last programmed direction of rotation is used Inputs e Coordinates of the end point of the arc e Radius R of the arc Fig 5 28 Circular path from to with radius R qi e Fora full circle two G02 G03 blocks must be programmed in succession e The distance from the starting and end points of the arc cannot be greater than the diameter of the circle e The maximum possible radius is 100 m Fig 5 29 Full circle with two G02 blocks Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting point S and end point on the contour can be connected with four different arcs of the same radius The arcs have different lengths and curvatures Larger arc CCA gt 180 arc is
184. ft key Then press the soft key for the desired file type for example SHOW I for ISO programs Use the arrow keys to move the highlight bar to the desired file Confirm your selection with the SELECT soft key or with ENT Close the file manager with END Functions for selecting files Key Soft key Move the highlight bar upward to the desired file Move the highlight bar downward to the desired file Move pagewise up through PAGE the file directory i Move pagewise down through PAGE the file directory Select the highlighted file TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 41 1 Introduction 1 6 File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 To copy a file Call the file manager with PGM NAME Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy Press the COPY soft key Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline Press ENT to copy the file The original file is retained Close the file manager with END To erase a file Press CL PGM Move the highlight to the file you wish to delete Press the DELETE soft key to erase the highlighted file Close the file manager with END To rename a file Call the file manager with PGM NAME Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename Shiftthe soft key row Press the RENAME soft key and type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline Press ENT to rename the file The
185. g behavior with M97 qi A corner machined with M97 will not be completely finished It may have to be reworked with a smaller tool Program structure Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 16 Move to contour point 17 The outside corners are programmed in blocks N20 and N50 These are the blocks in which you program M97 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 37 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining open contours M98 Standard behavior without M98 The TNC calculates the intersections S of the cutter paths and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Fig 5 46 Tool path without M98 Machining open corners with M98 With M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined Duration of effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed Fig 5 47 Tool path with M98 Program structure Move to contour point 10 Machine contour point 11 Move to contour point 12 5 38 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Standard setting Coordinates are referenced to the workpie
186. g its coordinates in the Cartesian coordinate system The pole remains in effect until a new pole is defined The designation of the pole depends on the working plane Working plane Pole AY l J YZ J K ZX Kod Fig 5 36 The pole is the same as a circle center G10 Straight line with rapid traverse G11 Straight line with feed rate F e Values from 360 to 360 are permissible for the angle H e he sign of H depends on the angle reference axis Angle from angle reference axis to R is counterclockwise H 0 Angle from angle reference axis to R is clockwise H O Fig 5 37 Contour consisting of straight lines with polar coordinates a 0 straight line in polar coordinates with rapid traverse Enter radius R from pole to end point of line here R 5 mm ET o uU Enter angle H from angle reference axis to R here H 30 Resulting NC block G10 R5 H30 5 28 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a hexagon Corner point coordinates Milling depth Tool radius Part program 5530 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 17 N40 T1 G17 S3200 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG N60 I 50 J 50 N70 G10 R 70 H 190 N80 Z 10 M03 N90 G11 G41 R 45 H 180 F100 N100 H 120 N110 H 60 N120 G91 H 60 N130 G90 H 60 N140 H 240 N150 H 180 N
187. g roughed out with G122 in which case O should be used for the radius of the roughing mill Example Rectangular pocket with round island Input parameters Milling depth O1 15 mm Path overlap Q2 1 Allowance side Q3 1 mm Allowance depth 04 1 mm Top surface of workpiece Q5 0 Setup clearance Q6 2mm Clearance height O7 50 Rounding radius Q8 10 mm Direction of rotation O9 1 Subcontours are defined in subprograms 1 and 2 Continued on next page TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 35 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il Part program HBS G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 G99 T2 L 0 R 2 5 N50 G99 T3 L 0 R 2 5 N60 G37 POT 1 P0227 N70 G120 Q1 15 Q2 1 Q3 1 Q4 1 Q5 0 Q62 2 Q72450 Q8 10 Q9 1 N80 L10 0 N90 T1 G17 S2500 N100 G121 Q10 10 0112100 013 2 N110 G79 M3 N120 L10 0 N130 T2 G17 S1500 N140 G122 Q10 10 011 100 Q12 500 N150 G79 M3 N160L10 0 N170 T3 G17 S3000 N180 G123 Q11280 Q12 250 N190 G79 M3 N200 G124 Q9 1 QO102 5 0112100 012 240 Q14 0 N210 G79 M3 N220 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 N230 G98 L10 N240 TO G17 N250 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N260 X 20 Y 20 M6 N270 G98 LO N280 G98 L1 N290 G01 G42 X 10 Y 50 N300 Y 90 N310 X490 N320 Y 10 N330 X410 N340 Y 50 N350 G98 LO N360 G98 L2 N370 G01 G41 X 35 Y 50 N380 50 J 50 N390 G02 X435 Y 50 NAOO G98 LO N99999 96588351
188. grams 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories Accessories 11 24 FE 401 floppy disk unit Description Applications Data interfaces Data transfer rate Disk drives Floppy disks Portable table top unit All TNC contouring controls as well as TNC 131 TNC 135 2 interfaces RS 232 C V 24 e TNC 2400 to 38 400 baud e PRT 110 to 9600 baud Separate drive for copying capacity 795 kilobytes approx 25 000 blocks up to 256 files 3 5 inen D gt DD 135 TRI TS 220 and TS 630 triggering 3D touch probes Description Signal transmission TS 220 TS630 Spindle insertion Probing reproducibility Probing speed TS 220 TS 630 Touch probe system with ruby tip and stylus with rated break point standard shank for spindle insertion Transmission via cable integrated interface Infrared transmission separate transmitting and receiving units manual automatic Better than 1 um 0 000 04 in Maximum 3 m min 118 ipm TT 120 triggering 3D touch probe Description Interface Installation Probing speed Touch probe system with hardened stainless steel probing element steel plate protection class IP 67 Connected to TNC via 5 V supply Fixed installation within the machine working space Maximum 3m min 118 ipm TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories Electronic handwheels HR 130 Integrable
189. gs TODUDSINVIDIHEO MONITU RE point with tool radius compensation G40 e n the tool axis to setup clearance above the workpiece surface e n the machining plane to the pocket center TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 13 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Rectangular pocket milling Pocket center coordinates 60 mm Setup clearance Milling depth Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min First side length Second side length Milling feed rate mm min Direction of cutter path POCKET MILLING cycle in a part program 9688121 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 N20 G31 G90 X 110 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 N40 T1 G17 S2000 N50 G76 P01 2 P02 10 P03 4 P04 80 P05 X 80 PO6 Y 40 P07 100 N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 N70 X 60 Y 35 MO3 N80 Z 2 M99 N90 Z 100 MO2 N99999 9688121 G71 8 14 Start of program Define workpiece blank Define tool Call tool Define POCKET MILLING cycle Retract in the infeed axis insert tool Approach the starting position center of pocket spindle ON Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call Retract in the infeed axis end of program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING G77 G78 Process e Circular pocket milling is a roughing cycle in which the tool penetrates the workpiece from the starting position pocket center e The cutter subsequently follows a spir
190. h a 3D Touch Probe With a 3D touch probe you can determine e position coordinates and from them e dimensions and angles on the workpiece To find the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS F95 Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point X X Y Y Z Z Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate cC Probe the workpiece The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as DATUM Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point as described under Corner as datum The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as DATUM 2 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe Measuring workpiece dimensions Fig 2 19 Measuring lengths with the 3D touch probe PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS 1 POS Move the touch probe to a position near the first touch point 7 Select the probing direction with the cursor keys Probe the workpiece If you will need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the DATUM display DATUM cC PROBING Select the probe function again with the soft key PROBING POS F98 Move the touch probe to a position near the second touch point 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 40
191. h incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool Fig 5 24 Incremental coordinates for a circle center qi e The circle center J K also serves as the pole for polar coordinates e The only effect of I J K is to define a position as a circle center the tool does not move to the position To program a circle center pole Select the first circle center designation for example Enter the coordinate for example 20 mm Select the second circle center designation for example J Enter the coordinate for example J 10 mm Resulting NC block 1 20 J 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 17 D 5 4 G02 G03 G05 Circular path around pole I J K Programming Tool Movements Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Prerequisites The circle center J K must be previously defined in the program The tool is at the circle starting point S Defining the direction of rotation Direction of rotation e Clockwise G02 e Counterclockwise G03 e No definition G05 the last programmed direction of rotation is used Input Fig 5 25 Circular path from to E l around J e End point of the arc qi The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected with MP 7431 e Fora full circle the end point in the G02 GO3 block should be the same as the starting point of the contour
192. he REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites The target table must exist The file to be copied must only contain the columns or lines you want to replace e You can also copy an entire directory together with its subdirectories Simply place the highlight on the directory you wish to copy and press the COPY DIR soft key Then proceed as described above in the section To copy individual files TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 To copy several files into another directory You must be in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation To select the functions for copying several files press the TAG soft key Functions for tagging copying files Soft key Tag one file TAG FILE Tag all files in the directory TAG ALL FILES Untag one file UNTAG FILE Untag all files in the directory UNTAG ALL FILES Copy the tagged files COPY TAG When overwriting several files confirm CONF IRM each file separately gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Arrange the screen layout with the WINDOW soft key to show file names in both halves of the screen In the right screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory into which you wish to copy the files Move the highlight to the left screen half In the left screen half use the PATH soft key to select the directory containing the files that you want to copy Move the highlight to the first fil
193. he datum in the same way as for non tilted axes either manually by touching the workpiece with the tool see page 2 7 or much more easily by allowing the part program to automatically set the datum with the aid of the HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe see page 2 14 The TNC then converts the datum for the tilted coordinate system The angular values for this calculation are taken from the menu for manual tilting regardless of whether the tilting function is active or not at The angular values entered in the menu for manual tilting see page 2 26 must correspond to the actual position s of the tilted axis or axes The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum Position display in the tilted system The positions displayed in the status window NOML and ACTL are in the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function e The touch probe function BASIC ROTATION cannot be used e PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2229 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane To activate manual tilting 3D ROT Select menu for manual tilting Select the tilt axis Enter the tilt angle for example 45 set TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE Conclude input A symbol for the tilted plane is shown in the status display whenever the TNC is moving the machines axes in the tilted plane QU If you have set the function TIL
194. he result of a measurement using a scale whose zero point is fixed at the datum and which you can rotate to different angles in the plane around the pole Fig 1 11 Identifying positions on a circular arc with polar coordinates The positions in this plane are defined by the e Polar Radius R the distance from the circle center l J to the position and the Polar Angle H the size of the angle between the reference axis and the scale 1 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Setting the pole The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates These coordinates also determine the reference axis for the polar angle H Coordinates of the pole Angle reference axis IJ X JK Y K Z Fig 1 12 Polar coordinates and their associated reference axes Datum setting The workpiece drawing identifies a certain point on the workpiece usually Z a corner as the absolute datum and perhaps one or more other points as relative datums The datum setting procedure establishes these points as the origin of the absolute or relative coordinate system The workpiece which is aligned with the machine axes is moved to a certain position relative to the tool and the display is set either to zero or to Y another appropriate value e g to compensate the tool radius Fig 1 13 The workpiece datum represents the origin of the Cartesian coordinate system TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B
195. hen it is used for the first time The TNC beginner should work through this manual completely from beginning to end to ensure that he is capable of fully exploiting the features of this powerful tool The TNC expert can use the manual as a comprehensive review and reference work The table of contents and numerous cross references help him quickly find the topics and information he needs Easy to read dialog flowcharts show him how to enter data for the desired function The dialog flowcharts aid the beginner by providing a description of the function of each key in a box to its right If the user already knows the keys he can concentrate on the illustrated input overview at the left of the flowchart The TNC dialog messages are represented in shaded boxes above the answering input sequence TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Layout of the dialog flowcharts Dialog initiation key 8 a b DIALOG PROMPT ON THE TNC SCREEN eg 8 SJ em Here the manual explains the function of the keys Answer the prompt with these keys Function of the key Press this key A broken line indicates that either the key above it or Function of the alternative key below it can be pressed EL Or this key The trail of points means that e the dialog is not completely illustrated or e the dialog continues on the next page Abbreviated dialog flowcharts In abbreviated flowcharts an arrow gt is used to indicate new entries or work step
196. highlight to the right screen half Press the WINDOW soft key to select one window mode Move the highlight to the file whose protection you wish to remove Shiftthe soft key row Press the UNPROTECT soft key gt Type the code number 86357 and confirm with ENT File protection is canceled the file no longer has status P Close the file manager with END TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 43 1 Introduction 1 6 File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 To format a floppy disk in the FE 401B Press the EXT key The TNC displays the files stored in the TNC memory in the left screen half and the files stored on the FE 401 in the right screen half gt Move the highlight to the right screen half Press the WINDOW soft key to select one window mode Shiftthe soft key row Press the FMT soft key Enter a name for the diskette and start formatting with ENT Close the file manager with END To convert and transfer files Press the EXT key gt Move the highlight in the left screen half to the file you wish to convert and transfer Shiftthe soft key row Press the CONVERT soft key Press the CONVERT gt A soft key for example to convert the file into an ASCII text file and store it on the FE 401 gt Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline and confirm with ENT Close the file manager with END 1 44 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415
197. hine slide moves in direct relation to the rotation of the handwheel A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Portable handwheels such as the HR 330 are connected via cable to the TNC Integral hand wheels such as the HR 130 are built into the machine control panel An adapter permits connec tion of up to three handwheels Your machine manufacturer can tell you more about the handwheel configuration of your machine Fig 1 7 HR 330 electronic handwheel TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 9 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Introduction This chapter discusses the following topics What is NC The part program Programming Reference system Cartesian coordinate system Additional axes Polar coordinates Setting the pole Datum setting Absolute workpiece positions Incremental workpiece positions Programming tool movements Position encoders Reference marks What is NC NC stands for Numerical Control that is the operation of a machine tool by a series of coded instructions comprised of numbers Modern controls such as the TNC have a built in computer for this purpose and are there fore called CNC Computerized Numerical Control The part program The part program is a complete list of instructions for machining a part It contains such information as the target position of a tool movement the path function how the tool should move toward the target position and the fee
198. imPadaainiaat 3 5 Moving machine axes durngan terr UDO s cesa ekaa vean ire n D adi den Rt pa aene 3 6 Resuming program run after an interruption esssssssssseee menn 3 6 VC OV OCT AIS Ga HU eR T 3 8 Returning to the COMLOUP wisirsnocdawernintalnatbadinhiawhdatenk n A EE Ea EErEE 3 9 3 3 Optional Block Skip wvisiiscescscinceeersetentevecscanestiaeaveseevesaeniesatneeeenaes 3 10 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs 3 11 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs eeeeeeeeee eene nennen nnne nnn nnn nnns 4 2 Layout ola prod C2 19 9 NET 4 2 E CIC UNG TIONS NR RR RT L 4 3 EZ NOS NER m 4 5 Seting tne tool dala MENOR AA AEA E ERA EErEE Ei E 4 5 Oversizes for lengths and radii delta values ssssssseH 4 6 Eritermg tool Gala MILO the p OOTODIseedrenfanresd Saa aine amicti ac a rtp ga rad Re nc n 4 7 Entering tool data in tables arsennaedgdsiensisdediidxd Ma Ebro onristngatiacun GOORE aU NOD ean rh Reed ince 4 8 des Reis SITES S NETT EO T T aE Ea ia aai 4 10 Pocket table Tor tool CHANGE cesse rot ionic beaten tees iona a bb iue AiR inania 4 14 CINTA COG HONE RET ANRE AEEA aS 4 15 OO AF TTC NOU 4 15 Automatic tool CHANGE IVI TO jannitescinsinisansiaiiatnboiilebanbenn FR ah aab resi Facta na aii 4 16 4 3 Tool Compensation Values eeeeeeeeeeeenn nennen nnns 4 17 E
199. in the additional status display p y Input data For a datum shift you need only enter the coordinates of the new datum zero point Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are referenced to the datum which was last Fig 8 45 Activation of datum shift valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Fig 8 46 Datum shift absolute Fig 8 47 Datum shift incremental Cancellation A datum shift is cancelled by entering the datum shift coordinates X 0 Y 0andZ 0 al When combining transformations a datum shift must be programmed before the other transformations Graphics If you program a new workpiece blank after a datum shift MP 7310 determines whether the workpiece blank is referenced to the current datum or the original datum MP 7310 see page 11 11 Referencing a new workpiece blank to the current datum enables you to display each part in a program in which several parts are machined TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 43 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Example Datum shift A machining sequence in the form of a sub program is to be executed twice a once referenced to the specified datum D X 0 Y 0 and b asecond time referenced to the shifted datum 2 X 40 Y 60 Cycle in part program S8401 G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4
200. ine guideways The figure to the right illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger is pointing in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb Is pointing in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction Fig 1 9 Designations and directions of the axes on a milling machine TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 11 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Additional axes The TNC can control the machine in more than three axes Axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respec tively see illustration Rotary axes are also possible and are designated as A B and C Fig 1 10 Direction and designation of additional axes Polar coordinates Although the Cartesian coordinate system is especially useful for parts whose dimensions are mutually perpendicular in the case of parts contain ing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While Carte sian coordinates are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a pole I J K from which a position is measured in terms of its distance from the pole and the angle of its position in relation to the pole You could think of polar coordinates as t
201. ing Position the tilt axis or axes with a GOO block to the appropriate angular value s Activate datum shift if required Define Cycle G80 WORKING PLANE enter the angular values for the tilt axes Traverse all main axes X Y Z to activate compensation Write the program as if the machining process were to be executed in a non tilted plane Reset Cycle G80 WORKING PLANE program G80 without entering tilt axes e Reset datum shift if required Pre position the tilt axes to the O position if required 2 Clamp workpiece 3 Preparations in the POSITIONING WITH MDI mode Preposition the tilt axis axes to the corresponding angular value s The angular value depends on the selected reference plane on the workpiece 4 Preparations in the MANUAL OPERATION mode Use the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the MANUAL OPERATION mode enter the angular values for the tilt axes into the menu see page 2 26 at The angular values entered in the menu must correspond to the actual position s of the tilted axis or axes respectively The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum 5 Set datum e Manually by touching the workpiece with the tool in the non tilted coordinate system see page 2 7 e Automatically by using a HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe see page 2 14 6 Start part program in the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode 7 MANUAL OPERATION Use the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORK
202. ing Behavior Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 Standard behavior without M116 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contouring feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in mm min The contouring feed rate is therefore independent of the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis Duration of effect M116 is effective until the program ends N99999 block whereupon it is automatically cancelled iL The machine geometry must be entered in machine parameters 7510 ff by the machine manufacturer Reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior without M94 The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual path of traverse 358 Reduce display of rotary axis to value less than 360 with M94 At the beginning of the block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes To have the TNC reduce the display fo
203. ing with MDI mode you can program the system file MDI I or MDI H for immediate execution MDI is programmed like any other part program Applications e Pre positioning e Face milling To program the system file MDI gt POSITIONING WITH MANL DATA INPUT Select MDI operating mode Program MDI as desired To execute the system file SIMDI gt POSITIONING WITH MANL DATA INPUT select POSITIONING MANUAL DATA INPUT operating mode Start program run alt The system file MDI must not contain a program call block 96 block or cycle call TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 45 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File MDI Example application Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Make a basic rotation with the 3D touch probe write down the ROTATION ANGLE then cancel the basic rotation again e Change the operating mode gt POSITIONING WITH MANL DATA INPUT Open the system file MDI e Program the rotation 3 0 e Select the rotary table axis e Enter the ROTATION ANGLE you wrote down The rotary axis corrects the misalignment 5 46 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels Subprograms an
204. ining e Occasionally for pre positioning the tool such as for cycle G47 SLOT MILLING e You can enable G43 and G44 by programming a positioning block with an axis key e The machine tool builder can set machine parameters to inhibit programming of single axis positioning blocks 4 18 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 3 Tool Compensation Values Machining corners If you are working without radius compensation you can influence the machining of outside corners with M90 see page 5 36 Outside corners The TNC moves the tool in a transitional arc around outside corners The tool rolls around the corner point If necessary the feed rate F is automatically re duced at outside corners to reduce stress on the machine for example with very great changes in direction Fig 4 11 The tool rolls around outside corners Inside corners To prevent the tool from damaging the contour be careful not to program the starting or end positions for machining inside corners at a corner of the contour The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour Fig 4 12 Tool path for inside corners TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 19 4 Programming 4 4 Program Creation Defi
205. is GND TXD RXD RTS CIS DSR Signal GND OonNOORWN gt OcmonNOOoRWDN gt OconNOoBRWDN gt OconNOoBRWDN gt OcmoOnNOoORWDN gt OonNOOBRWDN gt rig 9 9 Connecting a non HEIDENHAIN device to the RS 232 C V 24 interface 9 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces RS 422 V 11 Interface Only non HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS 422 interface External V 11 Adapter unit Block e g PC x m d Nr 249 819 01 ORWN OOAOONDAKRWDN gt OOONDOKRWN gt 12 T9 14 15 Fig 9 4 Pin layout of the RS 422 V 11 interface HEIDENHAIN connecting cable max 1000 m LI 1 E Id Nr 250 476 OOMOANOOBRWN gt BN GN E PT roe TTT js 15 OOnN OOBRWDN gt GND Chassis RXD CTS TXD RTS DSR DTR GND Signal RXD CTS TXD RTS DSR DTR al The pin layouts on the TNC logic unit X22 and on the adapter block are identical TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 9 9 9 External Data Transfer 9 4 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer HEIDENHAIN devices HEIDENHAIN devices FE floppy disk unit and ME magnetic tape unit are already adapted to the TNC They can be used for data transfer without further adjustments Example FE 401 floppy disk unit Connect the power cable to the FE Connect the FE and TNC with the data interfac
206. is Y directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing directions f em m X Fig 2 16 Probing the inside of a cylindrical surface to find the center Move the touch probe to a position approximately in the center of the circle The probe touches four points on the inside of the circle Rotate the touch probe by 180 if you are probing to find the stylus center only available on machines with spindle orientation depending on MP6160 Then probe another four points on the inside of the circle Terminate the probing function for finding the stylus center TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 17 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe 2 18 Enter the first coordinate of the datum for example in the X axis Select the second coordinate e g 1 JJ Enter the second coordinate of the datum for example in the Y axis Outside circle Fig 2 17 Probing the outside of a cylindrical surface to find the center Move the touch probe to the starting position near the first touch point 7 outside of the circle X X Y Y Probe the workpiece Repeat the probing process for points 2 3 and 4 see illustration Enter the coordinates of the datum After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B T
207. is cycle Input data Angle of orientation S according to the reference axis of the machining plane Input range O to 360 Input resolution 0 1 8 54 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles WORKING PLANE G80 307 U TL The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine manufac turer The following additional note applies to the TNC 426 On some machines with swivel heads tilting tables the machine manufacturer determines whether the angles programmed in the cycle are interpreted as coordinates of the tilt axes or as solid angles Your machine manual provides more detailed information on this subject The TNC supports machine tools with swivel heads the tool is tilted and or tilting tables the workpiece is tilted The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but Is executed in a plane that is tilted relative to the main plane Typical applications e Oblique holes e Contours in an oblique plane There are two ways to tilt the working plane e 3D ROT soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL operation modes see page 2 24 e Cycle G80 WORKING PLANE in the part program The tilting functions are coordinate transformations The transformed tool Fig 8 54 an i Pre position the tool perpendicular axis i e as calculated by the TNC always remains parallel to the actual to the
208. is retracted to the starting position at the end of the dwell time e At the starting position the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again Required tool A floating tap holder is required It must compen sate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process Fig 8 2 TAPPING cycle Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 x thread pitch e TOTAL HOLE DEPTH B thread length Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative sign means negative working direction e DWELL TIME Enter a dwell time between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction further information is available from the machine manufacturer e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool during tapping Calculations The feed rate is calculated as follows Pa do where Fis the feed rate mm min S is the spindle speed rpm and p is the thread pitch mm al e When a cycle is being run the spindle speed override knob is disabled The feed rate override knob is only active within a limited range preset by the machine manufacturer e For tapping right hand threads activate the spindle with M3 for left hand threads use MA 8 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Tapping with a floating tap h
209. ise MO5 Spindle STOP MO6 Tool change stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP e 3 5 Mos Coolant ON 6 Mog Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON e M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise coolant ON e M30 same function as MO2 e 3 5 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or e Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter e 8 3 M90 Only in lag mode Constant contouring speed at corners e 5 36 M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum e 5 39 M92 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine builder such as tool change position e 5 39 M93 Reserved M94 Reduce display of rotary axis to value less than 360 e 5 43 M95 Reserved M96 Reserved M97 Machine small contour steps e 5 37 M98 Completely machine open contours e 5 38 M99 Blockwise cycle call e 8 3 11 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 2 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect M Effect Effective at block Page start end M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired e 4 16 M102 Reset M101 e 4 16 M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F percentage e 5 40 M105 Machining with first Kv factor e M106 Machining with second Kv factor e M107 Suppress error message for replacement tool with oversize e M108 Reset M107 e M109 Con
210. isplays STATUS Set the STATUS soft key to ON a 6 Shift the soft key row RESET STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS pees PGM Pos TOOL TRANSF T TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 27 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays 1 28 Additional status display Soft key General program information STATUS POM Positions and coordinates STATUS POS Tool information STATUS TOOL Coordinate transformations Tool measurement General program information PROGRAM RUN TEST RUN FULL SEQUENCE Q53 03 P 2 023 PROGRAMS Q56 Q6 PO2 0108 058 08 Q72 012 PO2 026 Q72 072 PO2 029 CVCL Q 017 PO2 07 DEF 1 PECKING STATUS COORD TRANSF STATUS TOOL PROBE Name of main program Active programs Cycle definition Q Q P 2 027 CC X 35 2680 Q DWELL Q77 077 029 Fak ies 078 PO1 078 026 00 00 00 Q78 PO1 018 08 Dwell time counter Q 8 PO1 078 029 Q76 PO1 016 06 Q76 PO1 076 026 Q76 PO1 076 029 G54 01 Y 02 2 053 n STRRT STOP van RESET SINGLE AT OF F ON o N START Positions and coordinates MANUAL OPERATION AND EDITING 130 3527 84 3628 Machining time Circle center CC pole Type of position display 248 8836 90 0000 180 0000 Coordinates of the axes B 90 0000 C 180 0000 5 3 Ho Pe Tilt angle of the working plane c TOUCH DRTUM 3D ROT TOOL PR
211. k 1 End of program TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G24 Chamfer The chamfer function enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines Fig 5 17 Chamfer from S to Z Enter the length L to be removed from each side of the corner Prerequisites e he radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be the same e An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the current tool Fig 5 18 Tool radius too large You cannot start a contour with a G24 block A chamfer is only possible in the working plane The feed rate for chamfering is the same as in the previous block The corner point E is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour To program a chamfer e a Select the chamfer function CHAMFER SIDE LENGTH Enter the length to be removed from each side of the corner for example 5 mm Resulting NC block G24 R5 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 13 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Chamfering a corner Coordinates of the corner point E Length of chamfer Tool radius Milling depth Part program 29055141 G71 Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Workpiece blank MIN point N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Workpiece blank MAX point N30 G99 T5 L 5 R 10 Define the tool
212. key 0 Acknowledge automatically 7 ISO programming Block number increment MP7220 0 to 150 Length of file names MP7222 Maximum 8 characters 0 Maximum 12 characters 1 Bi 7 426 z N Maximum 16 characters 2 Inhibit particular file types QU If a particular file type is inhibited all files of this type will be erased MP7224 0 Do not inhibit file types 40 Inhibit HEIDENHAIN programs 1 Inhibit ISO programs 2 Inhibit tool tables 4 Inhibit datum tables 8 Inhibit pallet tables 76 Inhibit text files 32 Inhibit PNT tables 4128 Inhibit the editor for certain file types MP7224 1 Do not inhibit editor 0 Inhibit editor for HEIDENHAIN programs 1 Inhibit editor for ISO programs 2 Inhibit editor for tool tables 44 Inhibit editor for datum tables 48 Inhibit editor for pallet tables 16 Inhibit editor for text files 32 Inhibit editor for PNT tables 128 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Configure pallet files MP7226 0 Pallet file inactive 0 Number of pallets per pallet file 7 to 255 Configure datum files MP7226 1 Datum table inactive 0 Number of datums per datum table 7 to 255 Dialog language for TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 MP7230 German 0 English 7 Dialog language for TNC 426 MP7230 English 0 German 1 Czech 2 French 3 Italian 4 Spanish 5 Portuguese 6 Swedish 7
213. l MP6221 Time after which the axis should be lubricated 0 to 65 535 min l l 11 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters 3D touch probes and digitizing MP6300 Reserved Infeed of the stylus when digitizing with a measuring touch probe MP6310 0 1 to 2 0000 mm recommended input value 1mm Measure center misalignment of the stylus when calibrating a measuring touch probe MP6321 Measure center misalignment 0 Do not measure center misalignment 7 Assign touch probe axis to machine axis for a measuring touch probe Ensure that the touch probe axes are correctly assigned to the machine axes Wrong assignment could lead to a stylus break MP6322 0 Machine X axis parallel to Touch probe X axis 0 Touch probe Y axis 1 Touch probe Z axis 2 MP6322 1 Machine Y axis parallel to Touch probe X axis 0 Touch probe Y axis 1 Touch probe Z axis 2 MP6322 2 Machine Z axis parallel to Touch probe X axis 0 Touch probe Y axis 1 Touch probe Z axis 2 Maximum stylus deflection on measuring touch probes MP6330 0 1 to 4 0000 mm Feed rate for positioning measuring touch probes at MIN point and approaching contour MP6350 10 to 3 000 mm min Probing feed rate for measuring touch probes MP6360 10 to 3 000 mm min Rapid traverse for measuring touch probes in the probe cycle MP6361 10 to 3 000 mm min Feed rate decrease when the stylus of a measuring touch probe is
214. l to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways e he machine STOP button was pressed e A programmed interruption 3 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Resuming program run after an error e fthe error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error Clear the error message from the screen Restart the program or resume program run at the place at which it was interrupted e f the error message is blinking Switch off the TNC and the machine Remove the cause of the error Start again e f you cannot correct the error Write down the error message and contact your repair service agency TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 7 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Mid program startup u The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to the operating manual of your machine tool for further information With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If a part program has been interrupted with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the int
215. le depth for chip breaking e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool during drilling Calculations The advanced stop distance tis automatically calculated by the control e Ata total hole depth of up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm e Ata total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t total hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm 8 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example PECKING Hole coordinates D X 20mm 2 X 80mm Hole diameter Setup clearance Total hole depth Pecking depth mm Dwell time S Feed rate mm min PECKING cycle in a part program joo95l G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 1200 N50 G83 P01 2 P02 15 P03 10 P04 1 P05 80 Define PECKING cycle N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 20 Y 30 M03 Pre position for the first hole spindle ON N80 Z 2 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance call cycle N90 X 80 Y4 50 M99 Move to second hole call cycle N100 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 S85l G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 5 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles TAPPING with floating tap holder G84 Process e The thread is cut in one pass e Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool
216. le eH 1 definition has been deleted i l 22742602 H 3 To prepare for blockwise transfer 300 H 4 e Prepare the data interface 3500 QHOO0 a e Configure the data interface with the MOD 3501 eH 05 function RS 232 422 SETUP see page 10 4 25 MILES 680 SECTORS eet e f you wish to transfer a part program from a rT a say TEJ eo PC interface the TNC and PC see pages 9 5 and 11 3 Fig 3 1 TNC screen during blockwise transfer e Ensure that the transferred program meets the following requirements The highest block number must not exceed 99999999 The block numbers however can be repeated as often as necessary he program must not contain subprograms The program must not contain program section repeats All programs that are called from the transferred program must be selected status M J PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK Or j PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE TEST RUN D Show directory of files in external storage The soft key row shifts PROGRAM RUN Execute the program blocks at If data transfer is interrupted press the START key again TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 11 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs Jumping over blocks The TNC can jump over blocks to begin transfer at any desired block These blocks are then ignored during a program run or test run Select the program and start data transfer GOTO ENT Go to the block number at whi
217. lling in the positive direction of the axis of the longer side The cutter always starts in the positive Y direction on square pock A ets At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the starting position Required tool limitations p The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center The pocket sides are parallel to the axes of the coordinate system Fig 8 8 Infeeds and distances for the POCKET MILLING cycle Direction of rotation for roughing out Clockwise G75 Counterclockwise G76 Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE e MILLING DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH Q e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FIRST SIDE LENGTH Pocket length parallel to the first main axis of the machining plane e SECOND SIDE LENGTH amp Pocket width u Fig 8 9 Side lengths of the pocket The signs of the side lengths are always positive e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane Calculations The stepover factor K is calculated as follows k Kx where K is the overlap factor preset by the machine manufacturer and R is the cutter radius Corner radius The corner radius is determined by the radius of the milling tool Starting point Before a cycle is called the tool must be moved to the following starting ri
218. lly connects N100 G06 X450 Y 50 Arc to end point X 50 mm Y 50 mm connects tangentially to the straight line in block N90 N110 G01 X 100 Complete the contour N120 GOO G40 X 130 Y 70 Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N130 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis 99999 96552511571 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 25 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G25 Corner rounding The tool moves in an arc that Is tangentially connected to both the preceding and following contour elements G25 Is used to round corners Input e Radius of the arc e Feedrate for the arc Prerequisite The rounding radius must be large enough to accommodate the tool Fig 5 35 Rounding radius R between G1 and G2 qi e n both the preceding and subsequent positioning blocks both coordinates must lie in the plane of the arc e The corner point E is not part of the contour e Afeedrate programmed in a G25 block is effective only in that block After the G25 block the previous feed rate becomes effective again To program a tangential arc between two contour elements Select the corner rounding function C ROUNDING OFF RADIUS Enter the rounding radius for example R 10 mm cC Enter the feed rate for corner rounding for example F 100 mm min Resulting NC block G25 R 10 F 100 5420 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4
219. longer than a semicircle Input Radius R with negative sign R lt 0 Smaller arc CCA 180 arc is shorter than a semicircle Input Radius R with positive sign R20 CCA gt 180 CCA lt 180 Fig 5 30 Arcs with central angles greater than and less than 180 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 21 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Contour curvature and direction of rotation The direction of rotation determines the type of arc e Convex curving outward or G02 G41 R 0 Fig 5 31 Convex path e Concave curving inward G03 G41 R gt 0 Fig 5 32 Concave path To program a circular arc with a defined radius Circle Cartesian clockwise Enter the coordinates of the arc end point for example X 10 mm Y 2 mm Enter the radius of the arc for example R 5 mm and determine the size of the arc using the sign negative in this example Further entries if necessary e Radius compensation e Feed rate e Miscellaneous function Resulting NC block G02 G41 X 10 Y 2 R 5 5 22 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a concave semicircle Semicircle radius Coordinates of the arc starting point Coordinates of the arc end point Tool radius Milling depth Part program Yoo023 GZ1 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G9
220. m The tool offset resulting from a tilted axis and the machine geometry must be calculated by a postprocessor Automatic compensation of machine geometry with M114 The TNC compensates the tool offset resulting from positioning with tilted axes such as dx and dz in Fig 5 51 It calculates a 3D length compensa tion The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a postprocessor A programmed radius compensation RL or RR results in the error message ILLEGAL NC BLOCK Fig 5 51 Offset of the tool datum for tilting the tool Thus if you write the NC program with a postprocessor the machine geometry does not have to be calculated If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC the programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool otherwise it refers to the tool datum qi If you are working with a swivel head under program control you can interrupt program run and change the position of the tilt axis for example with the electronic handwheel Use the RESTORE POS AT N function block scan see page 3 8 to return to the point of interruption The TNC automatically calculates the new tilt axis position Cancelling M114 is cancelled by M115 or by a N99999 block aus The machine geometry must be defined by the machine manufacturer in machine parameters MP7510 and following 5 42 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contour
221. m Rari Qc e vai n i Vi t a 1 15 ICES ital workpiece DOSIUOLIB ss ci atri RO qvac ga ARE Rr nt a EH 1 15 Programming tool MOVEMENTS couseuked adus koci bb EP Rd ad RA HR RA UR RR t Rl pl p Kc Etc ad 1 18 Position encoders b sita rondadaduaanhd xdi doa ias da rtr EPEE as Pe op Rod QE ana ha ROC d 1 18 Reference marks III I m HI e PrE ENP nini nne rsen i n ni n a rn n n nn neni is 1 18 MEME calcem 1 19 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn 1 20 GaP AICS duning Progranin M REN m OT 1 20 gH ned 1 21 mie e enne cMENI TOTO 1 22 Cursor position during projection in 3 planes ssssssss n 1 23 Spit Mv 1 23 PAIN Y HVC qo zz SENE RE TREE 1 25 Repeating graphic SIMULATION esas latini adde rd REX ER V eR ERR ap eir la 1 26 Measuring the machining UTI usasessexetiku nere aig nha oe OR OD Scan Ri e 1 26 wc Te e c PM EE E E Km 1 27 Adamonal Status diS BIOS seriinin rien ovS eS PERS LUETU Eua RO Er Ra hn APRENDER NR 1 27 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 eene 1 30 Borko eE MNT 1 30 Callino tne THO Managel EUROS PITT 1 31 Functions Tor file rianageTTiBTit sosuesoesaioseiepeiio het ebr abbate run PR rrt ERI ERR Rr ba FRU RR PRESE 1 35 selecting file types ssssssssssssssse m nm e Ime emen nnne nnne nnne n nn n en nnn nenas 1 36 To copy individ
222. mber and an index Group name Group No Number Index System data Program information 10 1 MM inch condition Z Overlap factor for pocket milling S Number of active fixed cycle Machine status 20 1 Active tool number 2 Prepared tool number 9 Active tool axis 4 Programmed spindle rpm 5 Active spindle status 8 Coolant status 9 Active feed rate Data from the tool table 50 1 Tool length 2 Tool radius 9 Tool radius R2 4 Oversize for tool length DL 5 Oversize for tool radius DR 6 Oversize for tool radius DR2 7 Tool inhibited 0 or 1 8 Number of replacement tool 9 Maximum tool age TIME1 10 Maximum tool age TIME2 11 Current tool age CUR TIME 12 PLC status 13 Maximum tooth length LCUTS 14 Maximum plunge angle ANGLE 15 TT Number of teeth CUT 16 TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL 17 TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL 18 TT Rotational direction DIRECT 3 or 4 19 TT Offset for radius R OFFS 20 TT Offset for length L OFFS 21 TT Break tolerance in length LBREAK 22 TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK 7 18 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Group name Group No Number Active transformations 210 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 o D 5 Example Read a BASIC ROTATION from the MANUAL mode and store it in Q25 DTS Q25 PO1 210 P021 Transfer to the PLC 13 PLC The function D19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameter contents to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um
223. ment which tangentially connects to the arc Fig 5 34 The path of a tangential arc depends on the preceding contour element qi A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the GO6 block and in the positioning block preceding it must be in the plane of the arc To program a circular path G06 with tangential connection o 6 Circular path with tangential connection C eB D Enter the coordinates of the arc end point in incremental dimensions for example X 2 50 mm Y 2 10 mm x Bo veEBDU 6 Further entries if necessary e Radius compensation Feed rate e Miscellaneous function Resulting NC block G06 G42 G91 X 50 Y 10 5 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Circular arc connecting to a straight line Coordinates of the transition point from the straight line to the arc X i Coordinates of the arc end point Milling depth Tool radius Part program W925 G71 Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Define the workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T12 L 25 R 20 Define the tool N40 T12 G17 51000 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane Move the tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate N90 X410 Y 40 Straight line to which the arc tangentia
224. ming 4 3 Tool Compensation Values Movement without radius compensation G40 The tool center moves to the programmed coordi nates Applications e Drilling and boring e Pre positioning Fig 4 9 These drilling positions are entered without radius compensation Tool movement with radius compensation G41 G42 e Between two program blocks with different radius compensations you must program at least one block without radius compensation that is with G40 e Radius compensation does not come into effect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed e Whenever radius compensation is activated or cancelled the TNC positions the tool perpendicular to the programmed starting or end position Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the first or last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging the contour The tool center moves to the left G41 or right G42 of the programmed contour at a distance equal to the radius Left and right are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement assuming a stationary workpiece Fig 4 10 The tool moves to the left G47 or right G42 of the path during milling Shortening or lengthening single axis movements G43 G44 This type of radius compensation is only possible for single axis move ments in the working plane The programmed tool path is lengthened G43 or shortened G44 by the tool radius Applications e Single axis mach
225. mpts and TNC messages also appear Soft keys The soft keys select the functions shown in the soft key row immediately above them The shift keys to the right and left call up additional soft key rows Colored lines above the soft key row indicate the number of available rows The line representing the active row is highlighted TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Brightness control Contrast control owitchover between the active program ming and machining modes SPLIT SCREEN key for switching screen layout see page 1 6 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series Screen layout You can select the type of display on the TNC screen by pressing the SPLIT SCREEN key and one of the soft keys listed below Depending on the active mode of operation you can select Mode of operation Screen layout Soft key MANUAL Positions ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL POSITION Left positions POSITION Right STATUS STATUS POSITIONING WITH MDI Program blocks PGM Left program blocks PEM Right STATUS STATUS PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Program blocks PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK PGM TEST RUN Left program blocks PEM Right program structure conversational programming only SECTION Left program blocks PGH Right STATUS STATUS Left program blocks PEM Right graphics GRAPHICS Graphics GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING AND EDITING No screen selection possible the TNC displays program blocks only 1 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduc
226. n the tool table and in what sequence the data is displayed The sequence of information in the tool table shown in the illustrations to the right is only one example out of many possibilities If all the information in a table no longer fits on one screen this is indicated with gt gt or lt lt in the line with the table name at The following note applies to the TNC 426 If you are copying a tool table from an external storage device into the TNC you can overwrite individual lines or columns in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites The target table must exist The file to be copied must only contain the lines or columns you want to replace 4 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools To read out or read in a tool table see page 9 4 T326 426 Select external data input output directly from the table TRHMSFER Head out the table TNG EXT TRANSFER Read in the table only possible if EDIT ON is selected TNCS EXT TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 11 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Abbreviation Input Dialog T Number by which the tool is called in the program NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program TOOL NAME L Value for tool length compensation TOOL LENGTH L 7 R Tool radius R TOOL RADIUS R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical or
227. n each group D X 15mm Y 10mm aN KB um wu ww X bmm Y 10mm si UE n Uf Hole spacing IX 20mm Hole data Countersinking ZG dmm Drilling ZD 15mm Tapping ZI 10mm Part program 2096101 G71 Start program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define bank form N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T25 L 0 R 2 5 Tool definition for pecking N40 G99 T30 L 0 R 3 Tool definition for countersinking N50 G99 T35 L 0 R 3 5 Tool definition for tapping N60 T35 G17 S3000 Tool call for countersinking N70 G83 P01 2 P02 3 P03 3 P04 0 Cycle definition pecking Call subprogram 1 N90 T25 G17 52500 Tool call for pecking N100 G83 P01 2 P02 25 P03 10 P04 0 Cycle definition pecking NTIO L1 0 5 Call subprogram 1 N120 T30 G17 S100 Tool call for tapping N130 G84 P01 2 P02 15 P03 0 1 P04 100 Cycle definition tapping Call subprogram 1 Retract in the infeed axis end of main program Start subprogram 1 Move to hole group 1 Pre position in the infeed axis N190 L2 0 Call subprogram 2 N200 X 45 Y 60 Move to hole group 2 NZIOLZ 0 Call subprogram 2 N220 X 75 Y 10 Move to hole group 3 N230 L20 Call subprogram 2 N240 G98 LO End of subprogram 1 N250 G98 L2 Start of subprogram 2 N260 G79 N270 G91 X 20 M99 Drill holes with currently active cycle N280 Y 20 M99 N290 X 20 G90 M99 N300 G98 LO End of subprogram 2 N99999 9656101 G71 6 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section
228. n the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation t If you copy a tool table into TOOL T for a program run the old TOOL T will be overwritten Editing functions for tool tables The following functions help you to create and edit tool tables Function Key Move the highlight vertically Move the highlight horizontally Go to the beginning of the table Go to the end of the table END TRBLE Go to the next table page PAGE Go to the previous table page PAGE Go to the beginning of the next line NEXT LINE Look for the tool name in the tool table Display Do not display the tool pocket number in the first column TNC 426 only 4 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools To edit the tool table TOOL T gt PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK Switch the EDIT soft key to ON OFF ON To edit a tool table other than TOOL T PROGRAMMING AND EDITING ae B Call the file directory MGT SELECT Shift the soft key row and show file type T Cy T TYPE FILE NAME Select the tool table Enter a new file name and create a new table TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 9 4 Programming 4 2 Tools FULL SEQUENCE TOOL RADIUS The following information can be entered in tool 3 tables NAME e ool radius and tool length R L e Curvature radius of the tool point for three dimensional tool compensation R2 For graphic display of machining with a spherical cutter ent
229. ndard cycles Coordinate transformations and other special functions are also provided as standard cycles These cycles are grouped into the following types e Simple fixed cycles such as pecking and tapping as well as the milling operations slot milling rectangular pocket milling and circular pocket milling e SL Subcontour List Cycles group These allow machining of relatively complex contours composed of several overlapping subcon tours e SL Cycles group Il for contour oriented machining During rough out and finishing the tool follows the contour as defined in the SL cycles The cutter infeed positions are determined automatically by the control e Coordinate transformation cycles These enable datum shifts rotation mirroring enlarging and reducing for various contours e Special cycles such as dwell time program call and oriented spindle Stop Programming a cycle Defining a cycle Enter the G function for the desired cycle and program it in the dialog The following example illustrates how cycles are defined Select a cycle such as Rigid Tapping cC SETUP CLEARANCE i Enter the setup clearance here 2 mm TOTAL HOLE DEPTH Enter the total hole depth here 30 mm Enter the thread pitch here 0 75 mm Resulting NC block G85 P01 2 P02 30 P03 0 75 8 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 1 General Overview Cycle call The following cycles become effective
230. ning the blank form If you wish to use the TNC s graphic workpiece simulation you must first define a rectangular workpiece blank Its sides lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 30 000 millimeters long Fig 4 13 MIN and MAX points define the blank form at The ratio of the blank form side lengths must be less than 200 1 MIN and MAX points The blank form is defined by two of its corner points e MIN point smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values e MAX point largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values 4 20 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 4 Program Creation To create a new part program MGT cC Select any file of type for example OLD l FILE NAME OLD I eg Enter the name of the new file for example NEW I cC TNC 407 TNC 415B TNC 425 Ifthe dimensions in the program will be entered in millimeters G71 press the ENT key If the dimensions in the program will be entered in inches G70 press the NOENT key TNC 426 If the dimensions in the program will be entered in millimeters G71 press the MM soft key If the dimensions in the program will be entered in inches G70 press the INCH soft key E O G function for input of the MIN point cC 4 Define the tool axis G17 means the Z axis Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN points and
231. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 8 31 SRI DATA 10120 E 8 32 PIEOT DRICONG G12 DI ectes cine ne pnaricaentnenaetbamndsavatannnenctngameseneatenettarndeasntmonabanentnyihet 8 33 Te OUT 2 A PTT 8 34 FE eal To 8 34 SIDE FINISHING TO TPA a ussicatuidxeidaiaitonta Gita ala dr dtm odi nisin nnn Dc dcr hero 8 35 CONTOUR TRAIN 69175 ict otsdaxwr E eine a aN leita alg Ecke stain toate iR Lacinia 8 37 CTEINDER SURIEALCE T2 1 sana ONE FEUDUM a aaa 8 39 8 5 Coordinate Transformations cccccccccceccesseseceeeeseseeeueeuseueseueereans 8 42 prr NI EC r eE 8 43 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables G58 ssssssssssen Hee 8 45 MIRROR IVAGE 1020 aperar a a aa a e ae aere Taniak Tersi 8 48 POTA NA CIEL ere a A E A eet tne tnt etree 8 50 SCALING FACTOR 97 2 runerne anina na T und querere daos Pea ace ARSE 8 51 8 6 Other Cycles an ee ee ee ee ee eee 8 53 DYWELL TME T6 anirnar adinen aa eaaa ina cuntaguinoan Rad Ea aE OERE 8 53 PROGRAM CALE G39 usanii nne adaa ahaaa aaa aaia Ca ut dut 8 53 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP 103G airnn a aaa iaa ai aa 8 54 WORKING PLANE 16990 reseca aaa iaaa E a a R E a E a ita Kad que sita acad coton 8 55 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 External Data Transfer 9 1 Data Transfer with the TNC 426 ccccccesccseesseesceeeeeeseeneeeneeeneeees 9 2 To copy individual files into THE TN iai erp rrt rtrbonia b pra bueno xe FRE tH PEL RR E Ruban ERE b b
232. nput Automatic tool measurement number of cutting edges 20 cutting edges maximum Automatic tool measurement permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Automatic tool measurement permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Automatic tool measurement cutting direction of the tool for dynamic tool measurement Automatic tool length measurement tool offset between stylus center and tool center Preset value tool radius R Automatic tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to MP 6530 see page 11 6 between upper edge of stylus and lower edge of tool Preset value O Automatic tool measurement permissible deviation from tool length L for break detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Automatic tool measurement permissible deviation from tool radius R for break detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Information in tool tables TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Dialog NUMBER OF CUTTERS WEAR TOLERANCE LENGTH WEAR TOLERANCE RADIUS CUTTING DIRECTION M3 TOOL OFFSET RADIUS TOOL OFFSET LENGTH BREAK TOLERANCE LENGTH
233. ntry with ENT Close the MOD functions 10 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers The software numbers of the NC and PLC are displayed in the MOD function opening screen Directly below them are the code numbers for the installed options only for conversational programming e Digitizing option OPT 1 e Digitizing and measuring touch probe options OPT 11 10 3 Code Numbers A code number is required for access to certain functions Function Code number To cancel file erase and 86 357 edit protection status P To select user parameters 129 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 3 10 MOD Functions 10 4 Setting the External Data Interfaces Press the soft key marked RS 232 RS 422 SETUP to call a menu for setting the external data interfaces e MODE OF OP Type of external storage device FE1 FE2 ME EXT1 EXT2 LSV2 e BAUD RATE Sets the data transfer speed 110 to 38400 baud e ASSIGN Assigns either the RS 232 or the RS 422 interface to the operating modes e PRINT Outputs digitized data through RS 232 RS 422 or FILE Setting the RS 232 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 232 interface are entered in the upper left of the screen Setting the RS 422 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 422 interface are entered in the upper right of the screen Selecting the OPERATING MODE External device OPERATING MODE HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units e FE 401 B FET
234. o If you press the Z4 axis direction button in the MANUAL OPERATION mode the tool moves in X direction of the machine based coordinate system e n calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and the offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3D tool length compensation 8 56 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles Activation Cycle G80 becomes effective immediately after definition in part program ming If the function TILTING PROGRAM RUN is set to ACTIVE in the MANUAL mode see page 2 26 the angular value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle G80 Input data ROTARY AXIS AND TILT ANGLE The tilted axes of rotation together with the associated tilt angles The axes A B and C are programmed using soft keys at Entering an axis of rotation together with the associated tilt angle in Cycle G80 does not cause movement of the axis The axis must be positioned to the required angle for example with a GOO block Cancellation To cancel Cycle G80 program G80 without entering an axis of rotation Pre positioning LL The following note applies to the TNC 426 The machine manufacturer determines whether Cycle G80 positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether they must be pre positioned in the part program Your machine manual provides more detailed information I
235. o MP6530 between upper edge of stylus and lower edge of tool TT L OFFS 0 to 24 Tool offset between stylus center and tool center TT R OFFS 0 to 24 Length tolerance for tool break LBREAK 0 to 24 Radius tolerance for tool break RBREAK 0 to 24 Additional machine parameters for TNC 426 MP7266 22 MP7266 23 Tooth length Cycle 22 LCUTS 0 to 24 Maximum plunge angle Cycle 22 ANGLE 0 to 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters TNC displays TNC editor Configure pocket table column number of the data in the tool table for Do not show data in the table enter 0 MP7267 0 Tool number T 0 to 5 MP7267 1 Special tool ST 0 to 5 MP7267 2 Fixed pocket F 0 to 5 MP7267 3 Pocket locked L 0 to 5 MP7267 4 PLC Status PLC 0 to 5 MANUAL OPERATION mode Display feed rate MP7270 Display feed rate F only if an axis direction button is pressed 0 Display feed rate F even if no axis direction button is pressed feed rate of the slowest axis 1 Decimal character MP7280 The decimal character is a comma 0 The decimal character is a point 7 Position display in the tool axis MP7285 Display is referenced to the tool datum 0 Display in the tool axis is referenced to the tool face 1 Display step for the X axis MP7290 0 0 1 mm 0 0 05 mm 1 0 01 mm 2 0 005 mm 3 0 001 mm 4 0 0005 mm 5 0 0001 mm 6 Display step for the Y axis
236. ode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT TEST function is used TNC mode of operation Transfer function PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK PRINT PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE PRINT TEST RUN PRINT TEST You can set PRINT and PRINT TEST as follows Function Path to be entered Setting TNC 426 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Transfer data with D15 D16 via RS 232 E5232 hnis RS 232 Transfer data with D15 D16 via RS 422 po422 V siens RS 422 Save data to the TNC s hard disk or in the TNC memory TINO onto FILE save data in directory in which the program with D15 D16 is located TNC 426 Do not save data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 vacant vacant File names Data Mode of operation File name Values with D15 PROGRAM RUN D15RUN A Values with D15 TEST RUN D15SIM A Values with D16 PROGRAM RUN D16RUN A Values with D16 TEST RUN D16SIM A TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 5 10 MOD Functions 10 5 Machine Specific User Parameters The machine tool builder can assign functions to up to 16 user parameters For more detailed information on user parameters refer to your machine operating manual 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space The DATUM SET soft key enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the TEST RUN mode of operation OPERRTION TRAVERSE RANGE X 92 4343 1667 5657 Available traversing y 7213
237. ogram a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Radius H 0I Height H C2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 430 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 Fig 7 2 Part dimensions as O parameters To assign numerical values to Q parameters select PARAMETER select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select DO ASSIGN PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT Bl Enter the Q parameter number for example 5 FIRST VALUE PARAMETER Enter a value or another Q parameter whose value is to be assigned to Ob Resulting NC block DOO Q5 P01 6 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Example for exercise Full circle Circle center I J Beginning and end of circular arc C Milling depth Tool radius Part program without O parameters pec Ecran Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 1 YET Z 20 ssseeR Blank form MIN point N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 oo Blank form MAX point NSO G99 TO LFO RETO 9st mieten udin ection Define tool AO TO GT7 S1500 ees accio ente ctt de bete S D Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG ssseeeeee Retract and insert tool NGO X 50 Y 7 vvsavssanvassnasainbiorsin wines ERE Rara ea inda Pre position in the working plane OLO NIO T r Move tool to working depth NSO 50 J 50 vissinicetarasanrsiictsanoiwnns tien Ea gra iet a Coordinat
238. older Cutting an M6 thread at 100 rom Tapping coordinates X bO0mm Y 20 mm Pitch p 1 mm F xp gt Fz100 12 2100mm min Setup clearance 3 mm Thread depth 20 mm Dwell time 0 4 s Feed rate 100 mm min TAPPING cycle in a part program oorl G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 S100 N50 G84 P01 5 PO2 20 P03 0 4 P04 100 Define TAPPING cycle N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 50 Y 20 M03 Pre position in the plane spindle ON N80 Z 3 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance call cycle N90 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 968871 G71 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 7 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles RIGID TAPPING G85 V Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer to enable rigid tapping Process The thread is cut without a floating tap holder in one or several passes Rigid tapping offers the following advantages over tapping with a floating tap holder e Higher machining speeds possible e Repeated tapping of the same thread repetitions are enabled via spindle orientation to the O position during cycle call depending on machine parameter 7160 see page 11 13 e Increased traverse range of the spindle axis due to absence of a floating tap holder at e The con
239. on M symbols for basic rotation and or tilted working plane 3D ROT TOUCH DRTUM TOOL PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK A machining mode is Programming selected mode PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK RND EDITING 43805 G 1 N18 G30 Gi X 0 Y 0 2 40 Text of the N28 831 890 X 100 v 100 Z selected N30 G99 T1 L Q R 7 5 Graphics program N40 T1 G1 S1500 or additional N50 GOG G40 GSB 2 50 status display N60 G75 PO1 2 PO2 20 P 3 10 PO4 100 or program POS 80 PQS V 50 PO7 500 structure N70 X 50 Y 50 M3 RCTL 132 6870 Y 12 5600 Z 160 2550 B 30 0000 C 90 0000 Status display d o M 5 9 mojej j e ee 1 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series TNC Accessories 3D Touch Probe Systems The TNC provides the following features when used in conjunction with a HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe FE e Electronic workpiece alignment compensation of workpiece misalignment e Datum setting e Measurement of the workpiece during program run e Digitizing 3D surfaces optional only available with conversational programming e Measuring tools with the TT 120 touch probe only available ae Fig 1 6 TS 220 and TS 630 3D touch probes Electronic Handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate precise manual control of the axis slides Similar to a conventional machine tool the mac
240. only No standard dialog text prepared 1000 to 1099 TNC 426 only Internal error message see table on next page Your machine tool builder may have programmed a dialog text that differs from the above TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Error code 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 Error text SPINDLE MUST BE TURNING TOOL AXIS IS MISSING SLOT WIDTH TOOL LARGE TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE RANGE EXCEEDED START POSITION INCORRECT ROTATION NOT PERMITTED SCALING FACTOR NOT PERMITTED MIRRORING NOT PERMITTED DATUM SHIFT NOT PERMITTED FEED RATE IS MISSING ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT WRONG SIGN PROGRAMMED ENTERED ANGLE NOT PERMITTED TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE TOO MANY POINTS CONTRADICTORY ENTRY CYCL INCOMPLETE PLANE WRONGLY DEFINED WRONG AXIS PROGRAMMED WRONG RPM RADIUS COMP UNDEFINED ROUNDING OFF UNDEFINED ROUNDING RADIUS TOO LARGE PROGRAM START UNDEFINED EXCESSIVE SUBPROGRAMMING ANGLE REFERENCE MISSING TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Output through an external data interface D015 PRINT The function D15 PRINT transfers the values of Q parameters and error messages through the data interface for example to a printer e D15 PRINT with numerical values up to 200
241. ontour TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 51 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Example Scaling factor A contour Subprogram 1 is to be executed as originally programmed at the manually set datum X 0 Y 0 and then referenced to position X 60 Y 70 and executed with a scaling factor of 0 8 SCALING FACTOR cycle in a part program 2058471 G71 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 N40 T1 G17 1500 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N70 G54 X 70 Y 60 N80 G72 F0 8 Version 2 shifted and reduced in size N100 G72 F1 Cancel scaling factor N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 100 MO2 NTSO0 G9SL1 Same as subprogram on page 8 45 N250 G98 LO N99999 9658471 G71 The corresponding subprogram see page 8 45 is programmed after M2 8 52 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles DWELL TIME G04 Application This cycle causes the execution of the next block within a running pro gram to be delayed by the programmed dwell time The dwell time cycle can be used for such purposes as chip breaking Activation This cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Input data The dwell time is entered in seconds after G04 with F Input range O to 30 000 sec approx 8 3 hours in increments of 0 001 sec Resulting NC block
242. or Messages PGM SECTION CANNOT BE SHOWN e Enter a smaller tool radius e 4D and 5D movements cannot be graphically simulated e Enter a tool axis for simulation that is the same as the axis in the definition of the workpiece blank PLANE WRONGLY DEFINED e Do not change the tool axis while a basic rotation is active e Correctly define the main axes for circular arcs e Define both main axes for I J JK IK PROBE SYSTEM NOT READY e Besure the transmitting receiving window of the TS 630 is oriented to the receiving unit e Check whether the touch probe is ready for operation PROGRAM START UNDEFINED e Begin the program only with a G99 block e o notresume an interrupted program at a block with a tangential arc or if a previously defined pole is needed e Program the first block with axis motion with GOO G40 G90 RADIUS COMP UNDEFINED Enter radius compensation G41 or G42 in the first subprogram for Cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY ROUNDING OFF NOT PERMITTED Enter tangentially connecting arcs and rounding arcs correctly ROUNDING RADIUS TOO LARGE Rounding arcs must fit between contour elements TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 29 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 TNC Error Messages 11 30 SELECTED BLOCK NOT ADDRESSED Before a test run or program run you must enter GOTO O STYLUS ALREADY IN CONTACT Before probing pre position the stylus where it is not touching the workpiece surface TOOL RADI
243. origin P le I J K iuvisxVenidtbikisbades vi Ped dabis OU VA ERG pk Pd iic 5 28 G10 Straight line with rapid traverse sssssssssse mmn 5 28 G11 Straight line with feed rate F sssssssssssssssssRH eene 5 28 612 G13 G15 Circular path around pole I J K 1 netter rt ttn kranke 5 30 G16 Circular path with tangential transition sssssssssse e 5 32 VS Val AST IOI s PR RR EE aa a TE DE ESE AEE Ea 5 33 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data 5 36 omootning corners MIU amstri oinnia Get ra ae beta dum RE iaai Tarii 5 36 Macnining Small contour Steps MOT ausseeazieusmierkdibsxiufen usati uaa tad niie 5 37 Machining open contours M98 sepencaionat ace ao adecuada OC Rod 5 38 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 sereen 5 39 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M108 F sss 5 40 Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M111 ccc eecc cece cece eceeseeeueeeaeeeseeeneeeaeeenees 5 41 Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 E sseeessss 5 41 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 5 42 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 ssssssssHRRRR estan es 5 43 Reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 ssssssse 5 43 Optimized traverse of rotary axes M126 sssssssssssse HI emen 5 44 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File
244. original file name is erased Close the file manager with END To protect a file gt Call the file manager with PGM NAME Move the highlight to the file you wish to protect Shiftthe soft key row Press the PROTECT soft key The file now has status P and cannot be accidentally changed or erased Close the file manager with END To cancel file protection gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Move the highlight to the file whose protection you wish to remove Shiftthe soft key row Press the UNPROTECT soft key Type the code number 86357 and confirm with ENT File protection is canceled the file no longer has status P Close the file manager with END 1 42 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 6 File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 To convert a file Text files type A can be converted to any other type Other types of files can only be converted into ASCII text files They can then be edited with the alohanumeric keyboard Part programs that were created with FK free contour programming can also be converted to HEIDENHAIN conversational programs Call the file manager with PGM NAME Move the highlight to the file you wish to convert Shiftthe soft key row Press the CONVERT soft key Press the CONVERT FK gt H soft key Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline and confirm with ENT Close
245. ose protection you wish to remove Move the highlight to the desired file Shiftthe soft key row Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the UNPROTECT soft key Type the code number 86357 and confirm with ENT File protection is canceled the file no longer has status P Close the file manager with END 1 39 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 To convert a file Two soft keys are provided for converting files Functions for converting files Soft key FK program to HEIDENHAIN conversational format CONVERT FK gt H HEIDENHAIN conversational format to OEM cycle CONVERT H CYC To copy a file type into ASCII format A use the COPY function see page 1 36 Enter the file type A for the destination file You can also convert an ASCII file into another format To convert to ISO format for example enter the file type for the destination file Example Converting an FK program into HEIDENHAIN conversational format gt Call the file manager with PGM MGT Select the directory containing the file you wish to convert Move the highlight to the desired file Shiftthe soft key row Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the CONVERT FK gt H soft key gt Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline and confirm with ENT Close the file manager with END TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1999 1 1
246. ount for the starting position Starting position slot 1 AX 76 mum Y 15 mm Starting position slot X 20 mm Y 14 SLOT DEPTH 15 Setup clearance 2 Milling depth 15 mm Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min Slot length 1st milling direction Slot width 10 mm Feed rate 120 mm min SLOT MILLING cycle in a part program 2059101 71 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 Define tool N40 T1 G17 S2000 Call tool N50 G74 P01 2 P02 15 P03 5 P04 80 P05 X 50 POG Y 10 P07 120 Define slot parallel to X axis N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 76 Y 15 M03 Approach starting position spindle ON N80 Z 2 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call 1 N90 G74 P01 2 P02 15 P03 5 P04 80 P05 Y 80 POG X410 P07 120 Define slot parallel to Y axis N100 X 20 Y 14 M99 Approach starting position cycle call N110 Z 100 MO2 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 9688101 G71 8 12 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles POCKET MILLING G75 G76 Process The rectangular pocket milling cycle is a roughing cycle in which e the tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center e the tool subsequently follows the programmed path at the specified feed rate see figure 8 10 The cutter begins mi
247. our machine tool builder can provide you with further information on this feature To call help files Call the last active HELP file 0001 CHAIN FORWARD 0802 CHAIN BACKWARD CEND 25 3684 Y 250 3600 25 0000 B 331 0000 12 5000 M org T INSERT nove move O ps EE S ES BEGIN END OVERURITE ss TEXT TEXT Fig 10 6 HELP file in a machine operating mode TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 11 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC settings that the user may want to change in accordance with his requirements Some examples of user parameters are Dialog language Interface behavior Traversing speeds Sequence of machining Effect of overrides Input possibilities for machine parameters Machine parameters can be programmed as e Decimal numbers Enter only the number e Pure binary numbers Enter a percent sign 96 before the number e Hexadecimal numbers Enter a dollar sign before the number Example Instead of the decimal number 27 you can enter the binary number 11011 or the hexadecimal number 1B The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different number systems Some machine parameters have more than one function The input value for these machine parameters is the sum of the individual values For these machine parameters the individual values are preceded by a plus sign 40 7 e
248. piece dimensions Coordinates are programmed as absolute values G90 or relative values G91 In general you program the coordinates of the end point of the contour element The TNC automatically calculates the path of the tool based on the tool data and the radius compensation Machine axis movement under program control All axes programmed in a single block are moved simultaneously Paraxial movement The tool moves in a path parallel to the programmed axis G00 X 100 Number of axes programmed in the block 1 Fig 5 11 Paraxial movement Movement in the main planes The tool moves to the programmed position on a straight line or circular G00 X 70 Y 50 arc in a plane Number of axes programmed in the block 2 Fig 5 12 Movement in a main plane XY TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 ge 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 3 Path Functions Movement of three machine axes 3D movement The tool traight line to th d ition e tool moves in a straig is o the programmed position G01 X480 YO Z 10 Number of axes programmed in the block 3 Exception A helical path is created by combining a circular with a linear movement Fig 5 13 Three dimensional movement Entering more than three coordinates The TNC can control up to five axes simultaneously for example three linear and two rotary axes Such programs are too complex to program at the machine however Advantages of five axis machining o
249. play the same word in other blocks Inserting blocks e New program blocks can be inserted behind any existing block except behind the N99999 block or Select the block 8B epar new ak TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 3 4 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs Editing and inserting words Highlighted words can be changed as desired simply overwrite the old value with the new one After entering the new value press a horizontal cursor key or the END key to confirm the change In addition to changing the existing words in a block you can also add new words Use the horizontal cursor keys to move the highlight to the block you wish to add words to Erasing blocks and words lt Function Ke Set the highlighted number to O Erase an incorrect number C Clear a non blinking error message E E EJ uS Eus GL Delete the selected word Delete the selected block Erase program sections First select the last block of the program section to be erased 4 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Each tool is identified by a number The tool data consisting of the e length L e radius R are assigned to the tool number The tool data can be entered e into the individual part program in a G99 block or e once for each tool into a common tool table that is stored as a type T file Once a tool is defined the TNC associates its dimensions with the tool num
250. ptions e Machine STOP key e Switching to PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK If the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions Interruptions can be programmed directly in the part program Program run is interrupted at a block containing one of the following entries e 338 e Miscellaneous function MO MO2 or M30 e Miscellaneous function MO6 determined by the machine tool builder To interrupt or abort machining immediately The block which the TNC is currently executing is not completed Interrupt machining The symbol in the status display blinks Program run can be aborted with the INTERNAL STOP function INTERNAL Abort machining STOP The 3 symbol in the status display goes out To interrupt machining at the end of the current block You can interrupt the program run at the end of the current block by switching to the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK mode select PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 5 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Moving machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during a program interruption in the same way as in the MANUAL OPERATION mode Simply enable the machine axis direction buttons by pressing the MANUAL OPERATION soft key at Danger of collision If you interrupt program run while the working plane is tilted you can change from a tilted to
251. r a specific rotary axis only enter the axis after M94 Example M94 Reduce display of all active rotary axes M94 C Reduce display of the C axis only GOO C4 180 M94 First reduce display of all active rotary axes then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value Current angular value Doo Programmed angular value 180 Actual path of traverse 4 2 Duration of effect M94 is effective only at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 43 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Optimized traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior without M126 If you reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 the TNC will move the axis in the following way Actual position Nominal position Actual path of traverse 350 10 340 10 340 330 Optimized traverse of rotary axes with M126 If you reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 the TNC will move the axis in the following way Actual position Nominal position Actual path of traverse 350 10 20 10 340 30 Resulting NC block L C 10 A 340 RO F500 M126 Duration of effect M126 is effective at the beginning of the block M126 is cancelled by M127 or at the end of program 5 44 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File MDI In the position
252. r an M function becomes effective at the start or at the end of the block in which it is programmed An NC block can contain several M functions as long as they are inde pendent of each other Refer to the overview on the last cover page to see how the M functions are grouped A program run or test run will be interrupted when it reaches a block containing G38 If you wish to interrupt the program run or test run for a certain length of time use the Cycle G04 DWELL TIME see page 8 53 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 25 4 Programming 4 7 Actual Position Capture Sometimes you may want to enter the actual position of the tool in a particular axis as a coordi nate in a part program Instead of reading the actual n position values and entering them with the numeric El gt EORR RA R keypad you can simply press the actual position capture key see illustration at right You can use this feature to enter for example the tool length Fig 4 15 Storing the actual position in the TNC To capture the actual position MANUAL OPERATION Move the tool to the position that you wish to capture PROGRAMMING AND EDITING Select or create the program block in which you wish to enter the actual position of the tool e g Select the axis in which you wish to capture a coordinate for example X Transfer the actual position coordinate to the program Enter the radius compensation according to the position
253. ra ap NACE KR iS 2 17 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe 2 20 To find the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece sssssss 2 20 Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane ssseseseeeees 2 20 Measuring workpiece dimensions ssssssssee II emnes 2 21 Measuring angles pices ncestntdi anna uieansosie vne teal eave aaa Kaa aaa E aa aiaiai EA 2 22 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane eere eene 2 24 Traversing reference points with tilted axes sssssssee e 2 25 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate SYSTEM ccc cccecccccccc cece eeeeue este eeeseeesaeeeanes 2 25 Position display in the tilted system ccc ccc cece nce ce cece eee e ees Henne 2 25 Limitations on working with the tilting function ssssse 2 25 Toacivate monual UN OR RETE OUT TERRE 2 26 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Test Run and Program Run XE I mmm 3 2 lorna Felis Es REDIRET Tm m 3 2 To run a program test up to a certain block serepecs iseni esiin andie anii ni 3 3 The display functions TOF teSt rUn a iitcawcasarincesersssiavitcnpnaactnidconisensnitcenemuinasulaoagiiaacinddecsadaes 3 3 3 2 Program Run cuoi sen saree ee ewe te ne eeere mene pumped CU tud muro Ein etu x 3 4 Tonina pan p OA eean A E A 3 4 HLS PUT neci ID ssis anei caandedheteihcemblnnaubhtehalsatgmeniaithiniadi
254. rd for entering file names comments and other texts as well as programming in ISO format Numerical input and axis selection X v E Zz EK IV V CE Program and Tile management EE EG Arrow keys and GOTO key IPTE ENT Machine Programming Dialog initiation for operating modes conversational modes programming The keyboard of TNC 426 controls Typewriter style keyboard for entering file names comments and other texts as well as programming in ISO format Numerical input and axis selection DH 99 a 8 GO D kd 17 8 9 w E R E Y uy 1 0 P lt 4 15 6 i A S b E 6 H 3 K L gt 14 2 13 ps Z x c v B N M 2 C 4 v lol File management a pocket calculator ce P MOD functions A zi HELP functions S gap Ey Arrow keys and GOTO key Machine Programming Dialog initiation operating modes modes 1 4 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series Visual display unit B EM HE B BH NE B GRAPHICS hl TEXT SPLIT SCREEN Soft keys with context specific functions and two shift keys for additional soft key rows Headline The two selected TNC modes are shown in the screen headline the machining mode to the left and the programming mode to the right The currently active mode is displayed in the larger box where dialog pro
255. rent angular attitude of the display is indicated at the lower left of the graphic STORE ADD RESET psi psi SHOW OMIT ward H 00 00 00 wey s BLK FORM BLK FORM FORM D Fig 1 26 Rotated 3D view To switch the frame overlay display on off SHOL OMIT Show or omit the frame overlay of the workpiece blank form BLK FORM BLK FORM 1 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Magnifying details You can magnify details in the TEST RUN mode of operation in the following display modes e projection in three planes e 3D view provided that the graphic simulation is stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all three display modes MRGN 00 28 58 Fig 1 27 Magnifying a detail of a projection in three planes To select detail magnification WINDOW TRANSFER BLK DETAIL Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift sectional plane to reduce magnify the blank form If desired Select the isolated detail TRANSFER DETAIL Restart the test run or program run If a graphic display is magnified this is indicated with MAGN at the lower right of the graphics window If the detail is not magnified with TRANSFER DETAIL you can make a test run of the shifted sectional planes If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced the TNC displays an error message in the graphics window The error message disappears when the wo
256. rer defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 al Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9399 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Workpiece datum The user enters the coordinates of the datum for workpiece machining in the MANUAL OPERATION mode see page 2 7 If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum or to the additional machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the DATUM SET soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION mode Fig 5 49 Machine datum 4 amp and workpiece datum D Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 F Standard behavior without M103 F The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Reducing the feed rate during plunging with M103 F The TNC reduces the feed rate for movement in the negative direction of the tool axis to a given percentage of the last programmed feed rate Fzwx Pero Fo Pos Maximum feed rate in negative tool axis direction Faggi X Last programmed feed rate PNE Programmed factor behind M108 in Cancelling M103 F i
257. rking direction a negative value means negative working direction e THREAD PITCH B The sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread M3 with negative THREADING DEPTH Fig 8 4 Input data for THREAD CUTTING left hand thread M4 with negative THREADING DEPTH cycle at e The control calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the spindle speed override is used during thread cutting the feed rate is automatically adjusted e The feed rate override knob is disabled e The TNC automatically activates and deactivates spindle rotation Do not program M3 M4 before cycle call TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 9 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Thread cutting with a threading tool Cutting M12 threads into through holes in an upward movement Coordinates of the threaded holes 20 mm 70 mm X 20 mm Y X 0 mm Y Workpiece thickness 20 mm Thread pitch p 1 75 mm Spindle speed 100 Setup clearance at top Setup clearance at bottom THREAD CUTTING cycle in a part program C18 G71 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 G99 T1 L 0 R 6 T1 G17 S100 GOO G40 G90 Z 50 G86 P01 30 P02 1 75 X 20 Y 20 NES X 0Y 70 N100 L1 0 N110 GOO Z 100 M2 N120 G98 L17 N130 G36 SO N140 GOO G40 G91 X 2 N150 GOO G90 Z 5 N160 G01 Z 30 F 1000 N170 G91 X 2 N180 G79 N190 G98L0 N99999 96619 G71 Threading depth 30 mm positive direction thre
258. rkpiece blank is enlarged or reduced TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1225 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece blank or with a detail of it Function Soft key Restore workpiece blank as it was last shown RESET BLK FORM Show the complete BLK FORM as it appeared LJ IN DOL before a detail was magnified via TRANSFER BLK DETAIL FORM at The WINDOW BLK FORM soft key will return the blank form to its original shape and size even if a detail has been isolated and not yet magnified with TRANSFER DETAIL JE siae Block EST RUN Measuring the machining time 43815 G71 At the lower right of the graphics window the TNC N10 DOO Q1 Pot Q shows the calculated machining time in N20 DOO 02 PO a N30 DOO Q3 PGi 40 N35 DOO Q6 PO1 40 N36 DOO Q16 PO1 10 N40 DOO Q PO1 90 M58 DOO Qi PO1 90 o Program run N60 DOO Q8 PO1 0 The clock counts and displays the time from ie eee resent cc program start to program end The clock stops eee whenever machining Is interrupted N100 DOO Q12 PO1 0 N110 e Test run N120 DOO 020 PO1 500 63 calculates for the duration of tool movements eee de eM REESE FORM Fig 1 28 The calculated machining time is shown at the lower right of the workpiece graphic hours minutes seconds maximum 99 59 59
259. robe You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known point on the workpiece The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN see page 2 14 To prepare the TNC Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle Select the MANUAL OPERATION or ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL mode Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual values see page 10 8 Setting the datum in the tool axis qi Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than desired datum by the value d Fig 2 5 Workpiece setting in the tool axis right with protective shim Move the tool until it touches the workpiece surface ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Select datum setting only DR TUM SET Zero tool Set the display to Z O or enter the thickness d of the shim Preset tool Set the display to the length L of the tool here Z 50 mm or enter the sum Z L d TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 7 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe To set the datum in the working plane Fig 26 Setting the datum in the working plane plan view upper right Move the zero tool until it touches the side of the workpiece e g Select the axis a ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Selec
260. rt rounding arc between straight lines with M112 E The TNC inserts a rounding arc between two uncompensated straight lines The size of the arc depends on e the permissible deviation from the programmed contour entered for E if no deviation is entered the TNC assumes the permissible deviation to be infinite e the lengths of the two straight line segments between which the rounding arc is to be inserted e the programmed feed rate override setting 15096 and the circular acceleration defined by the machine tool builder through machine parameters From these three criteria the TNC calculates three rounding arcs and inserts the arc with the largest radius If necessary the contouring feed rate will automatically be reduced to comply with the programmed tolerance Fig 5 50 Permissible deviation E from the programmed contour The permissible deviation E should be less than the programmed distance between points Parameter programming You can also define E through O parameters Duration of effect M112 E is effective during operation with feed precontrol as well as with servo lag To cancel M112 E enter M113 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 41 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 307 Standard behavior without M114 The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part progra
261. s TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Contents User s Manual TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 TNC 426 280 5x0 xx 280 462 xx Introduction ISO Programming Manual Operation and Setup L Test Run and Program Run Programming L Programming Tool Movements Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Programming with Q Parameters L External Data Transfer MOD Functions L Tabels Overviews and Diagrams 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series cccccccscecseecseeeceeceeeceeecenseuseeanessesaeeseeseseeess 1 2 IE DOSE eescpssticxupbi pP DIEN EON IDE UDIN DUI NK RO A eE E EYE D EDU HDD ERE 1 4 MIS Meise AEN MR RR RTT ECPRTDR 1 5 iW geie ccol MUTET 1 9 1 2 Fundamentals of NC eeseeeseeeeeeennen nnne nennen nnn nnn nnns 1 10 AEA SIU O EEE ET EE E AE PO EEE A E AE ETTE T EEEE TEE 1 10 a E le E E E E E AAA E A A E EN 1 10 B pat proi alin ENTE m 1 10 PE n QI OUR TNT MIT 1 10 Reference SY SIC icsstensssa iini c do eta rinitin i tedita ERO PN ERR PEN abr ARENSE AEE Aa EAE anadir aani 1 11 Cartesian coordinate system sssssssssssssse II rr P e nennen nnne nnne nnn nnne nnns 1 11 Additonal AXES aienea n Uribe tate adul qii arbe eiu Usar uPdadad i bad Era AAE 1 12 Fot LOONA OS MEE 1 12 SEUES E EE TQ mm TT 1 13 Datumi Seting MNT TTTRRORRRNTRKR m 1 13 Absolute workpiece DOSITIOFIS u cxave vai kaui e vada Ra ER
262. s canceled by entering M103 without a factor Example Feed rate for plunging is to be 2096 of the feed rate in the plane Actual contouring feed rate mm min with override 10096 G01 G41 X420 Y 20 F500 M103 F20 500 Y 50 500 391 7 2 5 100 Y 5 7 5 367 X450 500 G90 Z45 500 qi M103 F is activated with machine parameter 7440 see page 11 13 5 40 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior M111 The programmed feed rate refers to the center of the tool path Constant contouring speed at circular arcs feed rate increase and decrease M109 The TNC reduces the feed rate for circular arcs at inside contours such that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant At outside contours the feed rate for circular arcs is correspondingly increased Constant contouring speed at circular arcs feed rate decrease only M110 The TNC reduces the feed rate for circular arcs only at inside contours At outside contours the feed rate remains the same Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 E Standard behavior without M112 E A contour consisting of many short straight lines is normally machined such that the corners are cut as exactly as possible When executing programs without tool radius compensation the feed rate is therefore decreased to zero at corners Inse
263. s of position referenced to position Absolute coordinates of position X 10mm Y 5mm Z 20mm Incremental coordinates of position Q IX 10mm Te IY 10mm Fig 1 16 Position definition through IZ 2 15 mm incremental coordinates If you are drilling or milling a workpiece according to a drawing with incremental coordinates you are moving the tool by the value of the coordinates An incremental position definition is therefore a specifically relative definition This is also the case when a position is defined by the distance to go to the nominal position The distance to go has a negative sign if the target position lies in the negative axis direction from the actual position TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Velo 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC The polar coordinate system can also express both types of dimensions e Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole l J and the reference axis e Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last nominal position of the tool Fo Vale Incremental dimensions in polar coordinates designated by G91 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Example Workpiece drawing with coordinate dimensioning according to ISO 129 or DIN 406 Part 11 figure 179 Dimensions in mm Coordinates Coordinate origin Pos 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 325 320 120 H7 1 1 2 900 320 o 120
264. s the last ten files you selected Press the downward or upward arrow key to move the highlight to the desired file Once the highlight is on the desired file confirm your selection with ENT Of Select the drive Select the directory Enter the file name directly with the ASCII keyboard Functions for selecting files Key Soft key Move the highlight bar upward to the desired file Move the highlight bar downward to the desired file Move pagewise up through PAGE the file directory i Move pagewise down through PAGE the file directory ll Select the highlighted file TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 lege 1 Introduction 1 5 File Management on the TNC 426 With the WINDOW soft key you can change the screen layout to show the contents of two different directories one in each half of the screen Use this setting for copying files between directories and for importing or exporting files Press the WINDOW soft key again if you wish to return to the other layout iiri c PROGRAMMING AND EDITING FILE NAME M File name Active path TNC S TES T HDH KONTURSAL T H TNC s H Active path File information File information 21000 21010 21020 21030 21040 H 02 1 H H H H H H H H H 21641 H QOQOH H H H H H H H H H H H 54 152 174 g 8G File display Files stored in the active directory File display Files stored in the active directory 00a 21050 21060 0020202 8
265. sational dialog or in G codes in accordance with ISO e To program the MDI H file in conversational dialog set the PROGRAM INPUT function to HEIDENHAIN e To program the MDI I file according to ISO set the PROGRAM INPUT function to ISO 10 10 Selecting the Axes for Generating L Blocks conversational programming only The AXIS SELECTION input field enables you to define the current tool position coordinates that are transferred to an L block To generate a separate L block press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE soft key see User s Manual for HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming On the TNC 407 up to 3 coordinates can be transferred on the TNC 415 B TNC 425 and TNC 426 controls you can transfer up to 5 coordinates The axes are selected by bit oriented definition similar to programming the machine parameters AXIS SELECTION 96011111 Transfer the X Y Z IV and V axes AXIS SELECTION 9601111 Transfer the X Y Z and IV axes AXIS SELECTION 96001 1 1 Transfer the X Y and Z axes AXIS SELECTION 960001 1 Transfer the X and Y axes AXIS SELECTION 9600001 Transfer the X axis TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 9 10 MOD Functions 10 11 Axis Traverse Limits 10 10 The AXIS LIMIT mod function allows you to set limits to axis traverse within the machine s actual working envelope Possible application to protect an indexing fixture against tool collision The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by
266. sin a and c cos a Error number Print F PRINT Reading system data Assignment PLC marker See page 7 7 PE Jf If c ge 7 10 7 10 7 10 7 11 Pt 13 7 11 7 10 7 14 7 16 Veit 7 18 7 19 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Sequence of Program Steps Milling an outside corner Program step Key Function Section in manual 1 Open or select program r3 4 4 Entries Program name sisi Blank form for graphic displays 030 031 44 3 Define tools G99 Entries Tool number o Tool length L Tool radius Ius 4 2 4 Call tool data T Entries Tool number Spindle axis G17 Spindle speed CN 4 2 5 Tool change Entries Feed rate rapid traverse GOO Radius compensation G40 Absolute dimensions G90 Coordinates of tool change position Mon Wien ov Miscellaneous function tool change MOG e g 5 4 6 Approach starting position Entries Feed rate rapid traverse GOO Radius compensation G40 Coordinates of starting position Kois Yir Lar Miscellaneous function spindle ON clockwise M03 5 2 5 4 7 Move tool axis to first working depth Entries Feed rate rapid traverse GOO Coordinate of the first working depth Zo 5 4 8 Approach contour Entries straight line interpolation G01 Radius compensation for machining G41 G42 Coordinates of first contour point Ress Vous Machining teed rate Pea For smooth approach if necessary program G26 after this block 5 2 5 4 9 Machining to last contour point Entries Enter all r
267. sine cosine tangent arc sine arc cosine arc tangent Square root Va and Root sum of squares Na b Squaring SQ Powers 4 T Logarithm Exponential function Negation NEG Forming an absolute number ABS Forming an integer INT Dropping the values before the decimal point FRAC Logical comparisons greater than less than equal to not equal to TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories TNC Specifications Block processing time Control loop cycle time Data transfer rate Ambient temperature Traverse range Traversing speed Spindle speed Input range TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 milliseconds per block TNC 407 25 ms block TNC 426 Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms speed TNC 425 Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms speed TNC 415 B Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms contour TNC 407 6ms TNC 426 Max 115 200 baud TNC 425 Max 38 400 baud TNC 415 B Max 38 400 baud TNC 407 Max 38 400 baud Operation 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F Storage 30 to 70 C 22 to 158 F Max x 100 m x 2540 in Max 300 m min 11 810 ipm Max 99 999 rpm Min 0 1 um 0 00001 in or 0 0001 TNC 407 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E TNC 426 E 1 um Max 99 999 999 mm 3937 in Or 99 999 999 11 23 11 Tables Overviews and Dia
268. sition is inserted into the preceding contour element Only the end point of the arc has to be programmed Corner rounding with radius R G25 An arc with tangential transitions is inserted between two contour elements TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Su 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G00 Straight line with rapid traverse G01 Straight line with feed rate F To program a straight line you enter e The coordinates of the end point of the straight line 6 e f necessary E radius compensation feed rate miscellaneous function The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the end point B The starting position is approached in the preceding block S Fig 5 16 Linear movement To program a straight line o 0 straight line with rapid traverse C If necessary cgp Select the axis orange colored axis key for example X 5 o Enter the coordinate of the end point If necessary Specify as relative coordinate for example G91 X 50 mm For a negative coordinate press the key once e g X 50 mm d Enter all further coordinates of the end point z b 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation left of the programmed contour The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation right of the programme
269. software limit switches This range can be additionally limited through the AXIS LIMIT mod function With this function you can enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis referenced to the machine datum Fig 10 5 Orienting traverse limits to workpiece size Working without additional traverse limits To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse enter the maxi mum traverse of the TNC 99999 999 mm as the AXIS LIMIT To find and enter the maximum traverse Enter the values that you wrote down as LIMITS in the corresponding axes Exit the MOD functions e he tool radius is not automatically compensated in the axis traverse limit values e he traverse range limits and software limit switches become active as soon as the reference points are passed OVer Datum display The values shown at the lower left of the screen are the manually set datums referenced to the machine datum They cannot be changed in the menu TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 12 HELP files Help files are a way to find information quickly that you would otherwise have to search for in a manual Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions before you can continue for example to retract the tool after an interruption in power The miscellaneous func tions may also be explained in a help file Help files are not provided on every machine Y
270. st and then surface machined or vice versa e the contour is milled conventionally or by climb cutting e all pockets are roughed out first and then contour milled over all infeeds or whether e contour milling and roughing out are performed mutually for each infeed Fig 8 16 Cutter path for roughing out TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 old 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Example Roughing out a rectangular island Rectangular island with rounded corners Tool center cut end mill ISO 1641 radius 5 mm Coordinates of the island corners X Y 70 mm 60 mm 15 mm 60 mm 15 mm 20 mm 70 mm 20 mm Coordinates of the auxiliary pocket X Y b mm b mm 105 mm b mm 105 mm 105 mm 9 o mm 105 mm starting point for machining X 40 mm Y 60 mm Setup clearance 2 mm Milling depth 15 mm Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min Finishing allowance Rough out angle Milling feed rate mm min ROUGH OUT cycle in a part program 58181 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 S2500 N50 G37 P012 P02 1 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 15 P03 8 P04 100 P05 0 PO6 0 PO7 500 N70 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N80 X 40 Y 50 MOs N90 Z 2 M99 N100 Z 100 M02 NT10 G9S8 L1 N120 G01 G42 X 40 Y 60 N130 X 15 N150 20 N160 G25 R12 N170 X 70 N180 G25 R12 N190 Y 60 N200 G25 R12 N210 X 40 N220 G98 LO N230 G98 L2 N2
271. stant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs increase and decrease feed rate e 5 41 M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge on circular arcs feed rate decrease only e 5 41 M111 Reset M109 M1 10 e 5 41 M112 Automatic insertion of rounding arcs at non tangential straight line transitions Enter tolerance T for contour deviation e 5 41 M113 Reset M112 e M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry during operation with tilting axes e 5 42 M115 Reset M114 e M116 Feed rate for angular axes in mm min e 5 43 M126 Optimized traverse of rotary axes e 5 44 M127 Reset M126 e 5 44 NL The miscellaneous functions M105 and M106 are defined and enabled by the machine tool builder Please refer to your machine manual for more information TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 17 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 2 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions Vacant miscellaneous functions 11 18 Vacant miscellaneous functions are set by the machine tool builder These functions are described in the machine manual M Function Effective at M Start End of block M01 M50 M07 M51 M10 M52 M11 M53 M12 M54 M15 M55 M16 M56 M17 M57 M18 M58 M19 M59 M20 M60 M21 M61 M22 M62 M23 M63 M24 M64 M25 M65 M26 M66 M27 M67 M28 M68 M29 M69 M31 M70 M32 M71 M33 M72 M34 M73 M35 M74 M36 M75 M37 M76 M38 M77 M39 M78 M40 M7
272. t datum setting Enter the position of the tool center here X 5 mm including the sign Repeat the process for all axes in the working plane qi The exact dialog for datum setting depends on machine parameters MP 7295 and MP 7296 see page 11 11 2 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes 3D Touch probe applications Your TNC supports a HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe Typical applications for touch probes e Compensating misaligned workpieces basic rotation e Datum setting e Measuring lengths and workpiece positions angles radii circle centers e Measurements during program run e Digitizing 3D surfaces Fig 2 7 3D touch probe model TS 120 qi e The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine manufacturerer for the use of a 3D touch probe e f you wish to make measurements during program run ensure that the tool data length radius axis are taken either from the calibrated data or from the last TOOL CALL block selection through MP 7411 see page 11 13 After you press the machine START button the touch probe begins executing the selected probing function The machine tool builder sets the feed rate F at which the probe approaches the workpiece MP6120 When the touch probe contacts the workpiece it e transmits a signal to the TNC the coordinates of the probed position are stored e stops moving and e returns to its starting position
273. tc Selecting general user parameters General users parameters are selected with code number 123 in the MOD functions at The MOD functions also include machine specific user parameters USER PARAMETERS 11 2 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters External data transfer Integrating TNC interfaces EXT1 5020 0 and EXT2 5020 1 to an external device MP5020 x 7 data bits ASCII code 8th bit parity 0 8 data bits ASCII code 9th bit parity 1 Block Check Character BCC any BCC 0 Block Check Character BCC BCC control character not permitted 2 Transmission stop through RTS active 4 Transmission stop through RTS inactive 0 Transmission stop through DC3 active 8 Transmission stop through DC3 inactive 0 Character parity even 0 Character parity odd 416 Character parity not desired 40 Character parity desired 432 1 Stop bits 0 2 Stop bits 64 1 Stop bit 128 1 Stop bit 792 Example Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 MP 5020 1 to an external non HEIDENHAIN device 8 data bits any BCC transmission stop through DC3 even character parity character parity desired 2 stop bits Input value 1404840432464 105 entry value for MP 5020 1 Interface type for EXT1 5030 0 and EXT2 5030 1 MP5030 x Standard transmission 0 Interface for blockwise transfer 1 Define data transfer through EX
274. te Transformations ROTATION cycle in a part program 29058461 G71 start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 N40 T1 G17 1500 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N70 G54 X 70 Y 60 N80 G73 G90 H 35 Version 2 shifted and rotated N100 G73 G90 H 0 Cancel rotation N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 100 M02 NT30 G96 L1 Same as subprogram on page 8 45 N250 G98 LO N99999 9658461 G71 The corresponding subprogram see page 8 45 is programmed after M2 SCALING FACTOR G72 Application G72 allows contours to be enlarged or reduced in size within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances Activation A scaling factor becomes effective as soon as it is defined The scaling factor can be applied e in the machining plane or on all three main axes at the same time depending on MP 7410 e to the dimensions in cycles e to the parallel axes U V W Input data The cycle is defined by entering the factor F The control then multiplies the coordinates and radii by F as described under Activation above Enlargement F gt 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction F lt 1 down to 0 000 001 Cancellation To cancel the scaling factor enter a scaling factor of 1 in the SCALING FACTOR cycle Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the c
275. th around a pole with tangential transition e The transition point must be exactly defined e The pole is not the center of the contour arc EB 6 Circle polar coordinates with tangential transition R B O Enter distance R from arc end point to pole here R 10 mm cC go U Enter angle from reference axis to R here H 809 and confirm entry Further entries if necessary Radius compensation R Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G16 R 10 H 80 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of circular motion in a main plane and linear motion in a plane perpendicular to the main plane Helices can only be programmed in polar coordinates Applications You can use helical interpolation with form cutters to machine e Large diameter internal and external threads e Lubrication grooves Fig 5 40 A helix combines circular motion with linear motion Input e Total incremental angle of tool traverse on the helix e otal height of the helix Total incremental angle Calculate the total incremental polar angle G91 H as follows H ness where n is the number of revolutions of the helical path G91 H can be programmed with any value from 5400 to 24 5400 i e up to n 15 Total height Enter the height h of the helix referenced to the tool axis The height is
276. the file manager with END File management for files on external data media You can erase and protect files stored on the FE 401B floppy disk unit from HEIDENHAIN You can also format a floppy disk from the TNC To do this you must first select the PROGRAMMING END EDITING mode of operation To erase a file on the FE 401B Press the EXT key The TNC displays the files stored in the TNC memory in the left screen half and the files stored on the FE 401 in the right screen half Move the highlight to the right screen half Press the WINDOW soft key to select one window mode Move the highlight to the file you wish to delete Press the DELETE soft key Close the file manager with END To protect a file on the FE 401B Press the EXT key The TNC displays the files stored in the TNC memory in the left screen half and the files stored on the FE 401 in the right screen half Move the highlight to the right screen half Press the WINDOW soft key to select one window mode gt Move the highlight to the file you wish to protect Shiftthe soft key row Press the PROTECT soft key The file now has status P and cannot be accidentally changed or erased Close the file manager with END To cancel file protection on the FE 401B Press the EXT key The TNC displays the files stored in the TNC memory in the left screen half and the files stored on the FE 401 in the right screen half Move the
277. the label setting function LABEL NUMBER Program section repeated starting at LABEL 7 for example Resulting NC block G98 L7 Specify the number of repeats Enter the number of repeats in the block that calls the label This is also the block that ends the program section Es 4 O uU The program section from LABEL 7 up to this block will be repeated ten times This means it will be run a total of eleven times Resulting NC block L7 10 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 5 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 2 Program Section Repeats Example for exercise Row of holes parallel to the X axis Coordinates of the first hole Hole spacing Number of holes Depth Hole diameter Part program 29095661 G71 Start program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 72 20 Define blank form N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 Define tool N40 T1 G17 S3500 Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract and insert tool N60 X 10 Y 10 Z 2 MO3 Pre position to the point which is offset in negative X direction by the hole spacing N70 G98 L1 Start of the program section to be repeated N80 G91 X415 Move to drilling position incremental dimension N90 G01 G90 Z 10 F100 Drill absolute dimension N100 GOO Z 2 Retract N110L1 5 Call LABEL 1 repeat program section from block N70 to block N110 five times total of six holes N120 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 955661 G71
278. ticular tilting table the so called translational components 2 24 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane Machines with swivel heads e You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with a GOO block e The position of the transformed tool axis like the position of the tool changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates also If you press the Z4 axis direction button in the MANUAL OPERATION mode the tool moves in X direction of the machine based coordinate system e n calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and the offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3D tool length compensation Traversing reference points with tilted axes When axes are tilted the reference points are traversed by pressing the machine axis direction buttons The TNC interpolates the tilted axes Make sure that the tilting function is active in the manual operating mode and that the actual angle value of the tilted axis was correctly entered in the menu see page 2 26 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system After you have positioned the tilted axes set t
279. ting position at the level of the setup clearance in the main plane Required tool This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 The cutter diameter must be smaller than the slot width and larger than half the slot width The slot must be parallel to an axis of the current coordinate system A Input data o V e SETUP CLEARANCE e MILLING DEPTH B Slot depth The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Fig 8 6 Infeeds and distances for the Traversing speed of the tool during penetration SLOT MILLING cycle e FIRST SIDE LENGTH O Slot length specify the sign to determine the first milling direction e SECOND SIDE LENGTH B Slot width e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane Starting point Before a cycle is called the tool must be moved to the following starting point with tool radius compensation G40 e n the tool axis to setup clearance above the workpiece surface e n the machining plane to the center of the slot second side length and within the slot offset by the tool radius Fig 8 7 side lengths of the slot TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 11 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Slot milling A horizontal slot 50 mm x 10 mm and a vertical slot 80 mm x 10 mm are to be milled The tool radius in the length direction of the slot is taken into acc
280. tion 1 1 The TNC 400 Series Screen layout of modes PROGRAMMING AND EDITING Machining mode Programming mode is selected PROGRRMMING RND EDITING OPERATION G01 2 25 F250 G83 PB1 1 P0O2 25 PUS3 5 P0O4 Q P 5 150 X 10 Y 52 M3 X 25 Y 90 M99 G98 L1 G91 X 10 M99 L1 7 progrem G90 X 100 Y 50 GOO Z 100 X 150 Y 25 5 G84 PO1 2 PO2 20 PO3 PO4 250 2 2 M3 M99 PRRR METER Text of the selected Soft key row TEST RUN Machining mode Programming mode is selected PROGRRM RUN TEST RUN FULL SEQUENCE 43813 G 1 N18 DOO G1 PO1 0 N20 DOO G2 PO1 0 N30 DOO G3 PO1 0 N35 DOO Q6 PO1 40 i Text of the e OE PUT a Graphics selected NASA Aar MEE or additional peo N5 DOO Q17 PO1 270 status display NGG DOO G8 PO1 0 N70 DOO O18 PO1 90 N80 DOO G9 PO1 0 N90 DOO Q10 PO1 50 N100 DOO Q12 PO1 0 nodi K 5 5 V 6 5 5 6 N120 DOO Q20 PO1 500 3 00 16 45 Bi c n START STOP M RESET NN TT Lt OFF ON a fS START TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 7 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 400 Series MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL modes A machining mode is Programming selected mode MRNURL OPERRTION RND EDITING 1235 0000 e Coordinates 456 0000 e Selected axis 48 0000 e means TNC 12 000 Additional in operation 102 0000 status display e Status display e g feed rate F miscellaneous functi
281. tly via cycle definition see also page 8 42 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Fig 8 48 Similar datum shifts Fig 8 49 Only absolute datum shifts are possible from a datum table 8 45 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Editing a datum table Datum tables are edited in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode aS p SELECT SH OL Show the datum table Select the desired file Enter new file name such as TAB D Edit the datum table The soft keys comprise the following functions for editing Function Soft key Go to the beginning of datum table BEGIN TABLE Go to the end of datum table END TABLE Page up PAGE Page down PAGE Insert line INSERT LINE Delete line DELETE LINE Enter line go to beginning of NEXT next line ae al e f you are using only one datum table be sure to activate the correct datum in the program run modes of operation e Datums from a datum table can be referenced either to the current datum or to the machine datum The desired setting is made in MP 7475 see page 11 14 e New lines can only be inserted at the end of the file 8 46 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations To leave a datum table E gt Select a different type of file for example programs in ISO format fx I cn SELECT Choose the selected program A TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 47 8 Cycles 8
282. toroid cutters TOOL RADIUS 2 DL Delta value for tool length TOOL LENGTH OVERSIZE DR Delta value for tool radius R TOOL RADIUS OVERSIZE DRZ Delta value for tool radius R2 TOOL RADIUS OVERSIZE 2 LCUTS Tooth length of the tool required for Cycle 22 TNC 426 only TOOTH LENGTH IN TOOL AXIS ANGLE Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut TNC 426 only MAXIMUM PLUNGE ANGLE TL Tool Lock TOOL INHIBITED YES ENT NO NOENT RT Number of a replacement tool if available see also TIME2 ALTERNATE TOOL TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes The meaning of this information can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more Information on TIME 1 MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool life exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE FOR TOOL CALL CUR TIME Time in minutes that the tool has been in use The TNC automatically counts the current tool life A starting value can be entered for used tools CURRENT TOOL LIFE DOC Comment on tool up to 16 characters TOOL DESCRIPTION PLG Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC STATUS Overview Information in tool tables TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Abbreviation CUT LTOL RTOL DIRECT TT R OFFS TT L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK Overview I
283. trol calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the spindle speed override is used during tapping the feed rate is automatically adjusted e The feed rate override knob is disabled Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface e TAPPING DEPTH B Distance between workpiece surface beginning of thread and end of thread The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e THREAD PITCH The sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread FIG 9 3 Input data for RIGID TAPPING cycle 8 8 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles THREAD CUTTING G86 V Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer to enable thread cutting Process Cycle G86 THREAD CUTTING is performed by means of spindle control The tool moves with the active spindle speed from its current position to the entered depth As soon as it reaches the end of thread spindle rotation is stopped Tool approach and departure must be programmed separately The most convenient way to do this is by using OEM cycles The machine manufacturer can give you further information Input data e THREADING DEPTH Distance between current tool position and end of thread The algebra ic sign determines the wo
284. tting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Corner as datum Fig 2 15 Probing procedure for finding coordinates of corner P PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING P A To use the points that were already probed for a basic rotation TOUCH POINTS OF BASIC ROTATION Transfer the touch point coordinates to memory Move the touch probe to a starting position near the first touch point of the side that was not probed for basic rotation cC Enter the first coordinate of the datum point for example in the X axis TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 15 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe DATUM Enter the second coordinate of the datum for example in the Y axis C If you do not wish to use the points that were already probed for a basic rotation TOUCH POINTS OF BASIC ROTATION L3 E Ignore the previous touch point coordinates ENT cC Probe both workpiece sides twice each Enter the coordinates of the datum 2 16 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders journals circular islands etc Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING CC Inside circle The TNC automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate ax
285. tum for coordinate system 3 Determine spindle speeds and feed rates 4 Switch on the machine 1 3 Cross over reference marks W or A 123 73 6 Clamp workpiece e 7 Set datum Reset position display 7a With 3D touch probe 7b Without 3D touch probe yy A 2 9 Entering and testing part programs 8 Enter part program or download P over external data interface d 5 109 9 9 Test part program for errors 34 10 Test run Run the program block by block without tool a2 11 Optimize the part program y if necessary D109 Machining the workpiece 12 Insert tool and run program ud e How to use this manual M This manual describes functions and features available on TNCs as of the following NC software numbers NC Software No TNC 407 280 580 04 TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 540 04 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 280 560 04 TNC 426 CA TNC 426 PA 280 462 01 TNC 426 CE TNC 426 PE 280 482 01 The suffixes E and F indicate export versions of the TNC The export versions TNC 415 F TNC 425 E TNC 426 CE and TNC 426 PE have the following limitations e nput and machining accuracy are limited to 1 um e Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes Some of the functions described in this manual are not available on all TNCs These functions are marked with symbols 407 Function not available on the TNC 407 415 Function not available on the TNC 415 25 Function not available on the TNC 425
286. ual the TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 3 Tool Compensation Values For each tool the TNC offsets the spindle path in the tool axis by the compensation value for the tool length and in the working plane by the compensa tion value for the tool radius Fig 4 7 The TNC compensates both the length and radius of the tool Effect of tool compensation values Tool length Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the tool axis moves To cancel length compensation call a tool with length L O al If a positive length compensation was active before tool TO was called the distance to the workpiece will be reduced With a G91 movement in the tool axis after a tool call with T the length difference between the previous tool and the new tool will be traversed in addition to the programmed value Tool radius Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved in the working plane with G41 or G42 To cancel radius compensation program a positioning block with G40 Tool radius compensation A tool movement can be programmed e Without radius compensation G40 e With radius compensation G41 or G42 e As paraxial movements G43 or G44 Fig 4 8 Programmed contour and the path of the tool center TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 17 4 Program
287. ual THES 2 ascsantiine rius dirik e e pn kon cde resa d tuner bul ust be gibr a pne bESaE EE EE FEE M NOE 1 36 To copy several files into another directory ssssssssse 1 37 jor EN ce RU Km 1 38 llox i i un i mi 1 38 WO Oe CTS MN ED EET 1 38 Bogen e Ei aee eie RU T T 1 38 eres 6 0 i RU UU 1 39 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 6 File Management on the TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 1 40 FU NES rs n NEMORE REORUM 1 40 E EIC CONNECT 1 41 Selecting a TII esusai esa onini Sato ap gab erue ti tw a tu ded dade dr Rea bU dE 1 41 llopess dM NER RSS my aia PESO a me RE Ae eae Tee 1 42 Toen e a TE TERRENOS 1 42 BOr a E e e a A A E 1 42 To protect a Tile NER RRRRRCRRRIRE 1 42 Tocancel Ne Protecto MNT NUNT 1 42 To converta E eiieeii aea aa a aa nEn ei SEE AEE ite o aaa iara E A a a 1 43 File management for files on external data media sssssssseee e 1 43 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes eeeeeseeeeee ener enne nnne nnne 2 2 Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons esssssese ee 2 2 Traversing with an electronic handwheel ssssssssee Henn 2 3 Using the HR 330 electronic handwheel ssssssHIe 2 3 incremental jog BOSITIODITIO acuauetestcxnba rib editi cade Va pua aka
288. ubprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inch 1 Prerequisites The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 The cylinder must be set up centered on the rotary table The tool axis must be perpendicular to the rotary table If this is not the case an error message will result TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group ll Example Rectangular channel on a cylindrical surface Channel width 20 mm Channel height 60 mm Depth 7 5mm Cylinder diameter 50 mm Length of programming plane Circumference of the cylinder 3 14 x 50 mm 157 mm You wish to enter the dimensional data for the rotary axis in mm Q17 1 Cycle in a part program JO CYLSURF G71 N10 G30 G18 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X4100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1L 40 R 6 N40 T1 G18 100 N50 GOO G40 G90 Y 100 N60 Cycle definition CYLINDER SURFACE GIA MILLING DEPTH Bo M ES ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE JOSTA E SETUP CLEARANCE SUC PECKING DEPTH GERE M FEED RATE FOR PECKING Bi c PET FEED RATE FOR MILLING BI n RADIUS Gi P DIMENSION TYPE ANG LIN Pre position on the rotary axis Call the cycle GOO Y 200 M2 Retract end of main program N100 G98 L1 N110 G01 G41 C 40 Z 20 Start position C 40 mm N120 C 50Z 20 N130 G25 R7 5 N140 G91 Z460 N150 G90 G25 H7 5 N160 G91 C 20
289. unit HR 150 Fixed axis handwheel for the HRA 110 adapter HR 330 Portable version transmission via cable Includes axis address keys rapid traverse key safety switch emergency stop button TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 25 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 TNC Error Messages The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects prob lems such as e Incorrect data input e ogical errors in the program e Contour elements that are impossible to machine e ncorrect use of the touch probe system An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block To clear a TNC error message first correct the error and then press the CE key Some of the more frequent TNC error messages are explained in the following list TNC error messages during programming 11 26 ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT e Enter a correct label number e Note the input limits EXT IN OUTPUT NOT READY e Connect the data transfer cable e ransfer cable is defective or not soldered properly e Switch on the connected device PC printer e he data transfer speeds baud rates are not identical FILE FORMAT HAS CHANGED After a software change the internal format has changed The TNC can no longer read the file Erase the file 207 B 325 FURTHER PROGRAM ENTRY IMPOSSIBLE Erase some old files to make room for new ones JUMP TO LABEL 0 NOT PERMITTED
290. uring penetration e FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 FLOOR FINISHING G123 Sequence Cycle G123 FLOOR FINISHING functions similar to Cycle G122 ROUGH OUT The tool approaches the machining plane in a vertically tangential arc Input data e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane 8 34 TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group ll SIDE FINISHING G124 Sequence The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finish milled separately Input data DIRECTION OF ROTATION O9 Direction of the cutter path Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise 1 PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed during penetration FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Traversing speed for milling ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE 014 Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If Q14 O is entered the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared Prerequisites The sum of ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q14 and the radius of the finish mill must be smaller than sum of ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE O3 Cycle G120 and the radius of the roughing mill This calculation also holds if G124 is run without havin
291. views and Diagrams 11 4 Features Specifications and Accessories 11 22 Programmable functions Contour elements Free contour programming Three dimensional radius compensation not on TNC 407 Program jumps Fixed cycles Coordinate transformations 3D touch probe applications Mathematical functions Straight line Chamfer Circular arc Circle center Circle radius Tangentially connecting circular arc Corner rounding straight lines and circular arcs for approaching and departing contours For all contour elements not dimensioned for conventional NC programming For changing tool data without having to recalculate the part program Subprograms Program section repeats Main program as subprogram Peck drilling and tapping also with synchronized spindle Thread cutting Rectangular and circular pocket milling Slot milling Milling pockets and islands from a list of subcontour elements Cylindrical surface interpolation Datum shift Mirroring Rotation Scaling factor Tilting the working plane not TNC 407 Touch probe functions for setting datums and for automatic workpiece measurement Digitizing 3D surfaces with the measuring touch probe optional not TNC 407 Digitizing 3D surfaces with the triggering touch probe optional conversational programming only Automatic tool measurement with the TT 120 touch probe conversational programming only Basic arithmetic x Trigonometry
292. y to be used 7 to 1024 kilobytes Screen saver Enter the time after which the TNC should start the screen saver MP7392 0 to 99 min 0 Function inactive 11 12 i ps 426 Pd hj N s M M IN P3 RJ P EJ c z M Pa S M M TNC 426 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Machining and program run Cycle G85 RIGID TAPPING Oriented spindle stop at beginning of cycle MP7160 Spindle orientation 0 No spindle orientation 7 Effect of Cycle G72 SCALING FACTOR MP7410 SCALING FACTOR effective in 3 axes 0 SCALING FACTOR effective in the working plane only 7 Tool data in the programmable probe Cycle G55 MP7411 Overwrite current tool data by the calibrated data from the 3D touch probe system 0 Current tool data are retained 7 Cycle G57 ROUGH OUT Selecting the pocket milling technique MP7420 Mill a channel around the contour clockwise for islands and counterclockwise for pockets 40 Mill a channel around the contour clockwise for pockets and counterclockwise for islands 41 First mill the channel then rough out the pocket 40 First rough out the pocket then mill the channel 2 Combine compensated contours 40 Combine uncompensated contours 4 Complete one process for all infeeds before switching to the other process 0 Mill channel and rough out for each infeed depth before continuing to the next depth 8 POCKET MILLING cycle

ISO: User's Manual TNC 407, TNC 415 B, TNC - i

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents